]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git/blame - ld/ld.texinfo
Check incompatible existing default symbol definition
[thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
56dd11f0 3@c Copyright 1991-2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
2a60a7a8
AM
33@set POWERPC
34@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
35@set Renesas
36@set SPU
37@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 38@set WIN32
e0001a05 39@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
40@end ifset
41@c man end
42
9160ea82
AM
43@ifnottex
44@dircategory Software development
45@direntry
252b5132 46* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
47@end direntry
48@end ifnottex
252b5132 49
0e9517a9 50@copying
e49e529d
JM
51This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
52@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
53@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
54@end ifset
55version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 56
56dd11f0 57Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 58
cf055d54 59Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 60under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
61or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
62with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
63Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 64section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 65@end copying
252b5132
RH
66@iftex
67@finalout
68@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 69@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 70@titlepage
71ba23f6 71@title The GNU linker
252b5132 72@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
73@subtitle @code{ld}
74@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
75@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
76@end ifset
252b5132
RH
77@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
78@author Steve Chamberlain
79@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
80@page
81
82@tex
83{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
84\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
85\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 86\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
87\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
88}
89\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
90@end tex
91
92@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 93@c man begin COPYRIGHT
56dd11f0 94Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 95
0285c67d 96Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 97under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
98or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
99with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
100Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 101section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 102@c man end
252b5132 103
252b5132
RH
104@end titlepage
105@end iftex
4ecceb71 106@contents
252b5132
RH
107@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
108
84ec0e6d 109@ifnottex
252b5132 110@node Top
71ba23f6 111@top LD
e49e529d
JM
112This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
113@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
114@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
115@end ifset
116version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 117
cf055d54 118This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
119Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
120in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 121
252b5132
RH
122@menu
123* Overview:: Overview
124* Invocation:: Invocation
125* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
126@ifset GENERIC
127* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
128@end ifset
129@ifclear GENERIC
130@ifset H8300
131* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
132@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
133@ifset Renesas
134* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
135@end ifset
136@ifset I960
137* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
138@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
139@ifset ARM
140* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
141@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
142@ifset M68HC11
143* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
144@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
145@ifset HPPA
146* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
147@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
148@ifset M68K
149* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
150@end ifset
833794fc
MR
151@ifset MIPS
152* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
153@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
154@ifset POWERPC
155* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
156@end ifset
157@ifset POWERPC64
158* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
159@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
160@ifset SPU
161* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
162@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
163@ifset TICOFF
164* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
165@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
166@ifset WIN32
167* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
168@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
169@ifset XTENSA
170* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
171@end ifset
252b5132
RH
172@end ifclear
173@ifclear SingleFormat
174* BFD:: BFD
175@end ifclear
176@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
177
178* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
179* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 180* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 181* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 182@end menu
84ec0e6d 183@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
184
185@node Overview
186@chapter Overview
187
188@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
189@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 190
0879a67a 191@ifset man
0285c67d 192@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 193ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
194@c man end
195
196@c man begin SEEALSO
197ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
198the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
199@file{ld}.
200@c man end
201@end ifset
202
203@c man begin DESCRIPTION
204
ff5dcc92 205@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 206their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 207compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 208
ff5dcc92 209@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
210a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
211to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
212
0285c67d
NC
213@ifset man
214@c For the man only
ece2d90e 215This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
216@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
217language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
218@end ifset
219
252b5132 220@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
221This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
222to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
223write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
224@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
225available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
226@end ifclear
227
228Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
229linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
230execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 231@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
232(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
233
0285c67d
NC
234@c man end
235
252b5132
RH
236@node Invocation
237@chapter Invocation
238
0285c67d
NC
239@c man begin DESCRIPTION
240
ff5dcc92 241The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
242and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
243you have many choices to control its behavior.
244
0285c67d
NC
245@c man end
246
252b5132
RH
247@ifset UsesEnvVars
248@menu
249* Options:: Command Line Options
250* Environment:: Environment Variables
251@end menu
252
253@node Options
254@section Command Line Options
255@end ifset
256
257@cindex command line
258@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
259
260@c man begin OPTIONS
261
252b5132
RH
262The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
263practice few of them are used in any particular context.
264@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 265For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
266object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
267link a file @code{hello.o}:
268
269@smallexample
270ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
271@end smallexample
272
ff5dcc92 273This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
274result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
275the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
276directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
277
ff5dcc92 278Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
279point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
280as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
281which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
282files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
283different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
284occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
285option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
286noted in the descriptions below.
287
288@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
289Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
290together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
291options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
292an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
293
294Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
295specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
296and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
297are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
298message @samp{No input files}.
299
36f63dca 300If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
301assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
302augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
303linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
304permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
305or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
306@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
307script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
308extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
309to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
310the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
311
312For options whose names are a single letter,
313option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
314whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
315option that requires them.
316
317For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 318precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 319@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 320this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 321only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
322@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
323name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
324output.
325
326Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
327option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
328immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
329@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
330Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
331accepted.
252b5132 332
36f63dca
NC
333Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
334(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
335prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
336compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
337
338@smallexample
2509a395 339 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
340@end smallexample
341
342This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
343silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
344may also arise when passing options that require values through a
345driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
346a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
347and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
348the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
349
350@smallexample
351 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
352@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
353
354Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
355linker:
356
ff5dcc92 357@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 358@include at-file.texi
dff70155 359
2509a395
SL
360@kindex -a @var{keyword}
361@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
362This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
363argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
364@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
365@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
366to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
367
7ee314fa
AM
368@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
369@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
371@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
372specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
373will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
374finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 375it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 376This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 377interface.
7ee314fa 378
252b5132
RH
379@ifset I960
380@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
381@kindex -A @var{arch}
382@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
383@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
384@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
385In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
386Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
387@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
388the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 389archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
390family}, for details.
391
ff5dcc92 392Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
393other architecture families.
394@end ifset
395
396@ifclear SingleFormat
397@cindex binary input format
398@kindex -b @var{format}
399@kindex --format=@var{format}
400@cindex input format
401@cindex input format
402@item -b @var{input-format}
403@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
404@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
405file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 406@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 407that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 408configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 409to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
410default input format the most usual format on each machine.
411@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
412supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
413formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
414@xref{BFD}.
415
416You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
417binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
418linking object files of different formats), by including
419@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 420particular format.
252b5132
RH
421
422The default format is taken from the environment variable
423@code{GNUTARGET}.
424@ifset UsesEnvVars
425@xref{Environment}.
426@end ifset
427You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
428@code{TARGET};
429@ifclear man
430see @ref{Format Commands}.
431@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
432@end ifclear
433
434@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
435@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@cindex compatibility, MRI
437@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
438@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 439For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 440files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
441@ifclear man
442@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
443@end ifclear
444@ifset man
445the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
446@end ifset
447Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 448the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
449scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
450If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
451specified by any @samp{-L} options.
452
453@cindex common allocation
454@kindex -d
455@kindex -dc
456@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 457@item -d
252b5132
RH
458@itemx -dc
459@itemx -dp
460These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
461compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
462even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
463script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
464@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
465
7ee314fa
AM
466@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
467@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
468@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
469@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
470Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
471@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
472specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
473will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
474option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 475The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 476
252b5132
RH
477@cindex entry point, from command line
478@kindex -e @var{entry}
479@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 480@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
481@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
482Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
483program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
484named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
485and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
486base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
487@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
488and other ways of specifying the entry point.
489
b58f81ae
DJ
490@kindex --exclude-libs
491@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
492Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 493exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
494@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
495automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
496port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
497explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
498option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
499be treated as hidden.
500
e1c37eb5
DK
501@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
502@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
503Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
504should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
505into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
506may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
507used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
508the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
509match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
510command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
511of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
512regardless of this option.
513
252b5132
RH
514@cindex dynamic symbol table
515@kindex -E
516@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 517@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
518@item -E
519@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
520@itemx --no-export-dynamic
521When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
522option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
523all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
524set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
525
526If you do not use either of these options (or use the
527@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
528dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
529referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
530
531If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
532back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
533dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
534linking the program itself.
535
55255dae 536You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 537be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 538See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 539
8b747e1a
DK
540Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
541support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
542the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
543
36f63dca 544@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
545@cindex big-endian objects
546@cindex endianness
547@kindex -EB
548@item -EB
549Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
550
551@cindex little-endian objects
552@kindex -EL
553@item -EL
554Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 555@end ifclear
252b5132 556
2509a395
SL
557@kindex -f @var{name}
558@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
559@item -f @var{name}
560@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
561When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
562to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
563table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
564symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
565
566If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
567run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
568the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
569first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
570@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
571in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
572Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
573implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
574machine specific performance.
575
576This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
577will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
578
2509a395
SL
579@kindex -F @var{name}
580@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 581@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 582@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
583When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
584the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
585of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
586on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
587
588If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
589run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
590dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
591filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
592found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
593used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
594@var{name}.
595
ff5dcc92 596Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 597toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
598object files.
599@ifclear SingleFormat
600The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 601@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 602@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
603environment variable.
604@end ifclear
605The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
606creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 607
3dbf70a2 608@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
609@kindex -fini=@var{name}
610@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
611When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
612executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
613address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
614the function to call.
615
252b5132
RH
616@kindex -g
617@item -g
618Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
619
2509a395
SL
620@kindex -G @var{value}
621@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 622@cindex object size
2509a395 623@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
624@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
625Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
626@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 627MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
628sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
629
630@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 631@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 632@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 633@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
634@itemx -soname=@var{name}
635When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
636the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
637which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
638linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
639field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
640
641@kindex -i
642@cindex incremental link
643@item -i
644Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
645
3dbf70a2 646@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
647@kindex -init=@var{name}
648@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
649When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
650executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
651of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
652function to call.
653
252b5132 654@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 655@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 656@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 657@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
658@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
659Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
660list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
661If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 662will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 663will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 664
ff5dcc92 665On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
666files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
667and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
668called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
669@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
670indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
671to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
672@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
673
674The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
675specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
676was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
677command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
678archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
679the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
680
ff5dcc92 681See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
682archives multiple times.
683
684You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
685
686@ifset GENERIC
687This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 688if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
689behaviour of the AIX linker.
690@end ifset
691
692@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 693@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 694@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 695@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 696@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
697Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
698for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
699option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
700in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
701on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 702@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
703order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
704how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
705option is specified.
252b5132 706
9c8ebd6a
DJ
707If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
708by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
709
252b5132
RH
710@ifset UsesEnvVars
711The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 712@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
713some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
714@end ifset
715
716The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
717@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
718at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
719
720@cindex emulation
721@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 722@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
723Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
724emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
725
726If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
727@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
728
729Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
730configured.
731
732@cindex link map
733@kindex -M
734@kindex --print-map
735@item -M
736@itemx --print-map
737Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
738information about the link, including the following:
739
740@itemize @bullet
741@item
3b83e13a 742Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
743@item
744How common symbols are allocated.
745@item
746All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
747which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
748@item
749The values assigned to symbols.
750
751Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
752involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
753have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
754linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
755of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
756the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
757linker script containing:
758
759@smallexample
760 foo = 1
761 foo = foo * 4
762 foo = foo + 8
763@end smallexample
764
765will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
766option is used:
767
768@smallexample
769 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
770 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
771 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
772@end smallexample
773
774See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
775scripts.
252b5132
RH
776@end itemize
777
778@kindex -n
779@cindex read-only text
780@cindex NMAGIC
781@kindex --nmagic
782@item -n
783@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
784Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
785libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
786mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
787
788@kindex -N
789@kindex --omagic
790@cindex read/write from cmd line
791@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 792@item -N
252b5132
RH
793@itemx --omagic
794Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
795not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
796libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
797mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
798is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
799specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
800
801@kindex --no-omagic
802@cindex OMAGIC
803@item --no-omagic
804This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
805sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
806be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
807shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
808
809@kindex -o @var{output}
810@kindex --output=@var{output}
811@cindex naming the output file
812@item -o @var{output}
813@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 814Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
815option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
816script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
817
818@kindex -O @var{level}
819@cindex generating optimized output
820@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 821If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 822the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
823should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
824option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
825the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
826no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
827of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 828
a712da20
NC
829@kindex -q
830@kindex --emit-relocs
831@cindex retain relocations in final executable
832@item -q
833@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 834Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
835Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
836order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
837in larger executables.
838
dbab7a7b
NC
839This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
840
4f471f39
RS
841@kindex --force-dynamic
842@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
843@item --force-dynamic
844Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
845to VxWorks targets.
846
252b5132
RH
847@cindex partial link
848@cindex relocatable output
849@kindex -r
1049f94e 850@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 851@item -r
1049f94e 852@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 853Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 854turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
855linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
856magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
857@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 858@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
859If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
860linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
861constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
862
62bf86b4
HPN
863When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
864partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
865relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
866example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
867with input files in other formats at all.
868
252b5132
RH
869This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
870
871@kindex -R @var{file}
872@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
873@cindex symbol-only input
874@item -R @var{filename}
875@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
876Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
877relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
878to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
879programs. You may use this option more than once.
880
ff5dcc92 881For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 882followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 883the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
884
885@kindex -s
886@kindex --strip-all
887@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 888@item -s
252b5132
RH
889@itemx --strip-all
890Omit all symbol information from the output file.
891
892@kindex -S
893@kindex --strip-debug
894@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 895@item -S
252b5132
RH
896@itemx --strip-debug
897Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
898
899@kindex -t
900@kindex --trace
901@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 902@item -t
252b5132 903@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 904Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
905
906@kindex -T @var{script}
907@kindex --script=@var{script}
908@cindex script files
909@item -T @var{scriptfile}
910@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
911Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 912@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 913@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
914output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
915the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
916specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
917options accumulate.
252b5132 918
14be8564
L
919@kindex -dT @var{script}
920@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
921@cindex script files
922@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
923@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
924Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
925
926This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
927processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
928command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
929@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
930behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
931command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
932the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
933@samp{gcc}).
934
252b5132
RH
935@kindex -u @var{symbol}
936@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
937@cindex undefined symbol
938@item -u @var{symbol}
939@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
940Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
941symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
942modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
943different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
944option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
945
946@kindex -Ur
947@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 948@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
949For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
950@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 951turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
952@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
953It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
954with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
955be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
956@samp{-r} for the others.
957
577a0623
AM
958@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
959@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
960Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
961@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
962missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
963specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
964multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
965input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
966in a linker script.
a854a4a7 967
252b5132
RH
968@kindex -v
969@kindex -V
970@kindex --version
971@cindex version
972@item -v
973@itemx --version
974@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 975Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
976lists the supported emulations.
977
978@kindex -x
979@kindex --discard-all
980@cindex deleting local symbols
981@item -x
982@itemx --discard-all
983Delete all local symbols.
984
985@kindex -X
986@kindex --discard-locals
987@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 988@item -X
252b5132 989@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
990Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
991system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
992or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
993
994@kindex -y @var{symbol}
995@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
996@cindex symbol tracing
997@item -y @var{symbol}
998@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
999Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1000option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1001to prepend an underscore.
1002
1003This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1004don't know where the reference is coming from.
1005
1006@kindex -Y @var{path}
1007@item -Y @var{path}
1008Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1009for Solaris compatibility.
1010
1011@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1012@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1013The recognized keywords are:
1014@table @samp
1015
1016@item combreloc
1017Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1018lookup caching possible.
1019
1020@item defs
560e09e9 1021Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1022shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1023
6aa29e7b
JJ
1024@item execstack
1025Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1026
b039ef04
L
1027@item global
1028This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1029the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1030of subsequently loaded libraries.
1031
cd6d6c15
NC
1032@item initfirst
1033This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1034It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1035before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1036the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1037the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1038objects.
1039
1040@item interpose
1041Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1042but the primary executable.
1043
5fa222e4
AM
1044@item lazy
1045When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1046dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1047the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1048Lazy binding is the default.
1049
cd6d6c15
NC
1050@item loadfltr
1051Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1052runtime.
1053
1054@item muldefs
1055Allows multiple definitions.
1056
1057@item nocombreloc
1058Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1059
1060@item nocopyreloc
1061Disables production of copy relocs.
1062
1063@item nodefaultlib
1064Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1065ignore any default library search paths.
1066
1067@item nodelete
1068Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1069
1070@item nodlopen
1071Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1072
1073@item nodump
1074Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1075
6aa29e7b
JJ
1076@item noexecstack
1077Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1078
1079@item norelro
1080Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1081
cd6d6c15
NC
1082@item now
1083When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1084dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1085when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1086deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1087first called.
1088
1089@item origin
1090Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1091
6aa29e7b
JJ
1092@item relro
1093Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1094
24718e3b
L
1095@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1096Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1097
1098@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1099Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1100
04c3a755
NS
1101@item stack-size=@var{value}
1102Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1103Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1104@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1105
cd6d6c15
NC
1106@end table
1107
ece2d90e 1108Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1109
1110@kindex -(
1111@cindex groups of archives
1112@item -( @var{archives} -)
1113@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1114The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1115either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1116
1117The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1118references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1119the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1120archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1121object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1122would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1123they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1124resolved.
1125
1126Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1127it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1128more archives.
1129
69da35b5
NC
1130@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1131@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1132@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1133@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1134Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1135recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1136and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1137the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1138behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1139so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1140restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1141
4a43e768
AM
1142@kindex --as-needed
1143@kindex --no-as-needed
1144@item --as-needed
1145@itemx --no-as-needed
1146This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1147on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1148the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1149on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1150needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1151emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1152non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1153the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries, a
1154non-weak undefined symbol reference from another dynamic library.
1155Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1156the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1157needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1158from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1159
e56f61be
L
1160@kindex --add-needed
1161@kindex --no-add-needed
1162@item --add-needed
1163@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1164These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1165their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1166options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1167and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1168
252b5132
RH
1169@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1170@item -assert @var{keyword}
1171This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1172
1173@kindex -Bdynamic
1174@kindex -dy
1175@kindex -call_shared
1176@item -Bdynamic
1177@itemx -dy
1178@itemx -call_shared
1179Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1180for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1181default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1182for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1183multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1184@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1185
a1ab1d2a
UD
1186@kindex -Bgroup
1187@item -Bgroup
1188Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1189section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1190object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1191@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1192only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1193
252b5132
RH
1194@kindex -Bstatic
1195@kindex -dn
1196@kindex -non_shared
1197@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1198@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1199@itemx -dn
1200@itemx -non_shared
1201@itemx -static
1202Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1203platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1204variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1205may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1206library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1207option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1208option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1209shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1210references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1211libraries.
252b5132
RH
1212
1213@kindex -Bsymbolic
1214@item -Bsymbolic
1215When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1216definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1217for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1218within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1219platforms which support shared libraries.
1220
40b36307
L
1221@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1222@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1223When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1224symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1225This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1226libraries.
1227
55255dae
L
1228@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1229@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1230Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1231typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1232global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1233within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1234to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1235in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1236which support shared libraries.
1237
1238The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1239scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1240
40b36307
L
1241@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1242@item --dynamic-list-data
1243Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1244
1245@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1246@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1247Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1248is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1249
0b8a70d9
L
1250@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1251@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1252Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1253
252b5132
RH
1254@kindex --check-sections
1255@kindex --no-check-sections
1256@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1257@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1258Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1259been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1260perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1261suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1262allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1263restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1264Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1265force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1266option.
252b5132 1267
ddbb8a31
NC
1268@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1269@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1270@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1271@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1272This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1273by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1274command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1275output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1276input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1277specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1278follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1279behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1280
1281This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1282libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1283mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1284their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1285required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1286the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1287dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1288symbols.
1289
252b5132
RH
1290@cindex cross reference table
1291@kindex --cref
1292@item --cref
1293Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1294generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1295Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1296
1297The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1298easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1299sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1300symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1301definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1302where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1303symbol are listed.
252b5132 1304
4818e05f
AM
1305@cindex common allocation
1306@kindex --no-define-common
1307@item --no-define-common
1308This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1309The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1310@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1311
1312The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1313the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1314of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1315forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1316Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1317from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1318This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1319and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1320duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1321paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1322
252b5132 1323@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1324@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1325@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1326Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1327address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1328times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1329limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1330context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1331symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1332constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1333using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1334Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1335space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1336@var{expression}.
1337
1338@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1339@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1340@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1341@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1342@itemx --no-demangle
1343These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1344and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1345present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1346underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1347mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1348different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1349to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1350demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1351is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1352
1353@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1354@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1355@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1356@item -I@var{file}
1357@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1358Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1359generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1360linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1361doing.
1362
7ce691ae 1363@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1364@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1365@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1366@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1367Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1368with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1369
252b5132
RH
1370@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1371@item --force-exe-suffix
1372Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1373
1374If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1375@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1376the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1377option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1378Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1379it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1380
1381@kindex --gc-sections
1382@kindex --no-gc-sections
1383@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1384@item --gc-sections
1385@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1386Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1387targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1388performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1389@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1390
d5465ba2
AM
1391@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1392examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1393symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1394command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1395referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1396libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1397referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1398the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1399relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1400
ac69cbc6 1401This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1402@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1403specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1404a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1405
c17d87de
NC
1406@kindex --print-gc-sections
1407@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1408@cindex garbage collection
1409@item --print-gc-sections
1410@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1411List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1412printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1413collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1414default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1415be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1416line.
1417
30824704
RM
1418@kindex --print-output-format
1419@cindex output format
1420@item --print-output-format
1421Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1422other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1423in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1424
252b5132
RH
1425@cindex help
1426@cindex usage
1427@kindex --help
1428@item --help
1429Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1430
ea20a7da
CC
1431@kindex --target-help
1432@item --target-help
1433Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1434
2509a395
SL
1435@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1436@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1437Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1438@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1439
1440@cindex memory usage
1441@kindex --no-keep-memory
1442@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1443@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1444symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1445instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1446necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1447while linking a large executable.
1448
1449@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1450@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1451@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1452@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1453Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1454is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1455The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1456behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1457libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1458
aa713662
L
1459@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1460@kindex -z muldefs
1461@item --allow-multiple-definition
1462@itemx -z muldefs
1463Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1464report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1465first definition will be used.
1466
b79e8c78 1467@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1468@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1469@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1470@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1471Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1472This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1473determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1474shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1475how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1476
903249d7
NC
1477The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1478referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1479an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1480a shared library.
1481
1482The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1483libraries specified at link time are that:
1484
1485@itemize @bullet
1486@item
1487A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1488that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1489resolvable at load time.
1490@item
1491There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1492symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1493
1494The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1495select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1496architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1497appropriate memset function.
1498@end itemize
b79e8c78 1499
31941635
L
1500@kindex --no-undefined-version
1501@item --no-undefined-version
1502Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1503it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1504will be issued instead.
1505
3e3b46e5
PB
1506@kindex --default-symver
1507@item --default-symver
1508Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1509exported symbols.
1510
1511@kindex --default-imported-symver
1512@item --default-imported-symver
1513Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1514imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1515
252b5132
RH
1516@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1517@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1518Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1519files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1520been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1521This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1522errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1523have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1524inappropriate.
1525
fe7929ce
AM
1526@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1527@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1528Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1529library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1530
252b5132
RH
1531@kindex --no-whole-archive
1532@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1533Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1534archive files.
1535
1536@cindex output file after errors
1537@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1538@item --noinhibit-exec
1539Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1540Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1541errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1542when it issues any error whatsoever.
1543
0a9c1c8e
CD
1544@kindex -nostdlib
1545@item -nostdlib
1546Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1547command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1548(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1549
252b5132 1550@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1551@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1552@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1553@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1554file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1555@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1556object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1557object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1558should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1559usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1560name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1561list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1562command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1563this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1564@end ifclear
1565
36af4a4e
JJ
1566@kindex -pie
1567@kindex --pic-executable
1568@item -pie
1569@itemx --pic-executable
1570@cindex position independent executables
1571Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1572ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1573libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1574address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1575normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1576defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1577
252b5132
RH
1578@kindex -qmagic
1579@item -qmagic
1580This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1581
1582@kindex -Qy
1583@item -Qy
1584This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1585
1586@kindex --relax
1587@cindex synthesizing linker
1588@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1589@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1590@item --relax
28d5f677 1591@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1592An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1593@ifset GENERIC
1594This option is only supported on a few targets.
1595@end ifset
1596@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1597@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1598@end ifset
1599@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1600@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1601@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1602@ifset XTENSA
1603@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1604@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1605@ifset M68HC11
1606@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1607@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1608@ifset POWERPC
1609@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1610@end ifset
252b5132 1611
28d5f677
NC
1612On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1613global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1614addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1615synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1616instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1617
1618On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1619debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1620@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1621This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1622family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1623@end ifset
1624
1625@ifset GENERIC
1626On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1627but ignored.
1628@end ifset
1629
28d5f677
NC
1630On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1631@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1632
252b5132
RH
1633@cindex retaining specified symbols
1634@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1635@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1636@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1637@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1638Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1639discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1640symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1641@ifset GENERIC
1642(such as VxWorks)
1643@end ifset
1644where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1645run-time memory.
1646
1647@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1648or symbols needed for relocations.
1649
1650You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1651line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1652
1653@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1654@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1655@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1656@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1657Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1658linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1659arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1660them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1661also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1662objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1663@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1664ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1665@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1666
ff5dcc92 1667The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1668SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1669@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1670runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1671options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1672gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1673file systems.
252b5132 1674
ff5dcc92 1675For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1676followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1677the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1678@end ifset
1679
1680@ifset GENERIC
1681@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1682@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1683@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1684When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1685happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1686of the input files.
1687
1688When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1689non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1690shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1691explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1692specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1693@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1694either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1695appearing multiple times.
1696
28c309a2
NC
1697This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1698that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1699is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1700runtime linker would do.
1701
252b5132 1702The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1703libraries:
252b5132
RH
1704@enumerate
1705@item
ff5dcc92 1706Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1707@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1708Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1709between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1710specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1711used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1712at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1713by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1714the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1715@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1716On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1717@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1718environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1719@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1720On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1721directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1722@item
a1b8d843 1723For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1724variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1725@item
ec4eb78a
L
1726For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1727@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1728libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1729@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1730@item
252b5132
RH
1731The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1732@item
1733For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1734exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1735@end enumerate
1736
1737If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1738warning and continue with the link.
1739@end ifset
1740
1741@kindex -shared
1742@kindex -Bshareable
1743@item -shared
1744@itemx -Bshareable
1745@cindex shared libraries
1746Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1747and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1748shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1749undefined symbols in the link.
1750
252b5132 1751@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1752@item --sort-common
1753@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1754@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1755This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1756ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1757sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1758eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1759between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1760specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1761
2509a395
SL
1762@kindex --sort-section=name
1763@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1764This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1765patterns in the linker script.
1766
2509a395
SL
1767@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1768@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1769This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1770patterns in the linker script.
1771
252b5132 1772@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1773@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1774Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1775each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1776size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1777
1778@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1779@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1780Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1781output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1782This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1783certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1784cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1785that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1786support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1787input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1788more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1789many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1790
1791@kindex --stats
1792@item --stats
1793Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1794as execution time and memory usage.
1795
2509a395 1796@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1797@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1798Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1799configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1800that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1801
252b5132
RH
1802@kindex --traditional-format
1803@cindex traditional format
1804@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1805For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1806the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1807use the traditional format instead.
1808
1809@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1810For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1811symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1812full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1813@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1814trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1815combine duplicate entries.
1816
2509a395
SL
1817@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1818@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1819Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1820address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1821times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1822line.
1823@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1824for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1825@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1826should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1827sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1828
2509a395
SL
1829@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1830@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1831@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1832@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1833@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1834@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1835@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1836Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1837@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1838
2509a395
SL
1839@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1840@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 1841@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
1842When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
1843byte of the text segment.
258795f5 1844
9d5777a3
RM
1845@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1846@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1847@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1848When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1849the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1850text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1851
0d705e9f
AM
1852@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1853@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1854@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
1855When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
1856model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
1857
560e09e9
NC
1858@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1859@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1860Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1861values for @samp{method}:
1862
1863@table @samp
1864@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1865Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1866
1867@item report-all
da8bce14 1868Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1869
1870@item ignore-in-object-files
1871Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1872ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1873
1874@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1875Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1876ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1877when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1878libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1879command line.
1880@end table
1881
1882The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1883by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1884
1885Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1886unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1887can change this to a warning.
1888
1715a13c
L
1889@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1890@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 1891@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 1892@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 1893Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1894supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
1895the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1896argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
1897
1898@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1899@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1900@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1901Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1902used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1903about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1904is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1905see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1906use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1907symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1908@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1909
7ce691ae 1910@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1911@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1912@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1913@item --warn-common
1914Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 1915a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
1916but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1917you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 1918Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1919warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1920
1921There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1922
1923@table @samp
1924@item int i = 1;
1925A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1926file.
1927
1928@item extern int i;
1929An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1930There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1931variable somewhere.
1932
1933@item int i;
1934A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1935variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1936The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1937single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1938size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1939a definition of the same variable.
1940@end table
1941
1942The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1943Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1944just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1945encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1946a common symbol.
1947
1948@enumerate
1949@item
1950Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1951definition for the symbol.
1952@smallexample
1953@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1954 overridden by definition
1955@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1956@end smallexample
1957
1958@item
1959Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1960the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1961except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1962@smallexample
1963@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1964 overriding common
1965@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1966@end smallexample
1967
1968@item
1969Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1970@smallexample
1971@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1972 of `@var{symbol}'
1973@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1974@end smallexample
1975
1976@item
1977Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1978@smallexample
1979@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1980 overridden by larger common
1981@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1982@end smallexample
1983
1984@item
1985Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1986the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1987encountered in a different order.
1988@smallexample
1989@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1990 overriding smaller common
1991@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1992@end smallexample
1993@end enumerate
1994
1995@kindex --warn-constructors
1996@item --warn-constructors
1997Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1998object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1999detect the use of global constructors.
2000
2001@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2002@item --warn-multiple-gp
2003Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2004This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2005Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2006section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2007of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2008base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2009base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2010bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2011large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2012values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2013option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2014
2015@kindex --warn-once
2016@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2017@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2018@item --warn-once
2019Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2020which refers to it.
2021
2022@kindex --warn-section-align
2023@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2024@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2025@item --warn-section-align
2026Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2027alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2028The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2029is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2030the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2031
8fdd7217
NC
2032@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2033@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2034Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2035
a0c402a5
L
2036@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2037@item --warn-alternate-em
2038Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2039
560e09e9
NC
2040@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2041@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2042If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2043@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2044This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2045
2046@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2047@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2048This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2049it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2050
252b5132
RH
2051@kindex --whole-archive
2052@cindex including an entire archive
2053@item --whole-archive
2054For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2055@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2056in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2057files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2058library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2059library. This option may be used more than once.
2060
7ec229ce 2061Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2062about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2063Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2064list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2065your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2066
2509a395
SL
2067@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2068@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2069Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2070@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2071undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2072@var{symbol}.
2073
2074This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2075wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2076wishes to call the system function, it should call
2077@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2078
2079Here is a trivial example:
2080
2081@smallexample
2082void *
cc2f008e 2083__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2084@{
cc2f008e 2085 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2086 return __real_malloc (c);
2087@}
2088@end smallexample
2089
ff5dcc92 2090If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2091all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2092instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2093call the real @code{malloc} function.
2094
2095You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2096links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2097you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2098file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2099call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2100
6aa29e7b
JJ
2101@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2102@item --eh-frame-hdr
2103Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2104@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2105
e41b3a13
JJ
2106@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2107@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2108Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2109generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2110if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2111
6c1439be
L
2112@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2113@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2114@item --enable-new-dtags
2115@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2116This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2117systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2118@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2119and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2120If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2121created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2122those options are only available for ELF systems.
2123
2d643429 2124@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2125@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2126Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2127close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2128time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2129increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2130value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2131
fdc90cb4
JJ
2132@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2133@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2134Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2135@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2136new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2137the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2138hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2139
35835446
JR
2140@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2141@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2142This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2143linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2144for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2145about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2146
4f9c04f7 2147Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 21481021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2149run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2150has been used.
2151
2152The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2153enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2154
c0065db7
RM
2155@kindex --build-id
2156@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2157@item --build-id
2158@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2159Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2160The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2161file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
2162@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2163parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2164@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2165@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2166an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2167characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2168omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2169
2170The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2171that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2172unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2173to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2174file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2175string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2176
2177Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2178@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2179@end table
2180
0285c67d
NC
2181@c man end
2182
36f63dca 2183@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2184
0285c67d
NC
2185@c man begin OPTIONS
2186
ff5dcc92 2187The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2188the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2189normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2190use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2191@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2192like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2193symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2194object file).
2195
2196In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2197support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2198PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2199values by either a space or an equals sign.
2200
ff5dcc92 2201@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2202
2203@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2204@item --add-stdcall-alias
2205If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2206as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2207[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2208
2209@kindex --base-file
2210@item --base-file @var{file}
2211Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2212addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2213@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2214[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2215
2216@kindex --dll
2217@item --dll
2218Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2219@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2220file.
bb10df36 2221[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2222
88183869
DK
2223@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2224@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2225@item --enable-long-section-names
2226@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2227The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2228the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2229for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2230fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2231to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2232allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2233disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2234generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2235as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2236with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2237GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2238information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2239option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2240section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2241when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2242image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2243[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2244
252b5132
RH
2245@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2246@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2247@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2248@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2249If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2250do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2251only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2252resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2253undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2254@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2255to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2256warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2257import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2258to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2259feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2260@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2261mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2262[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2263
522f09cd
KT
2264@kindex --leading-underscore
2265@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2266@item --leading-underscore
2267@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2268For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2269in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2270disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2271
252b5132
RH
2272@cindex DLLs, creating
2273@kindex --export-all-symbols
2274@item --export-all-symbols
2275If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2276be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2277otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2278explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2279attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2280option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2281@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2282@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2283exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2284re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2285such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2286@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2287@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2288Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2289not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2290extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2291(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2292These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2293@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2294@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2295@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2296@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2297[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2298
2299@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2300@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2301Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2302exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2303[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2304
2927aaca
NC
2305@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2306@item --exclude-all-symbols
2307Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2308[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2309
252b5132
RH
2310@kindex --file-alignment
2311@item --file-alignment
2312Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2313file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2314512.
bb10df36 2315[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2316
2317@cindex heap size
2318@kindex --heap
2319@item --heap @var{reserve}
2320@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2321Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2322to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2323committed.
bb10df36 2324[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2325
2326@cindex image base
2327@kindex --image-base
2328@item --image-base @var{value}
2329Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2330the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2331is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2332your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2333other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2334for dlls.
bb10df36 2335[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2336
2337@kindex --kill-at
2338@item --kill-at
2339If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2340symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2341[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2342
26d2d8a2
BF
2343@kindex --large-address-aware
2344@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2345If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2346header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2347greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2348or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2349section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2350[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2351
f69a2f97
NC
2352@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2353@item --disable-large-address-aware
2354Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2355This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2356driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2357addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2358[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2359
252b5132
RH
2360@kindex --major-image-version
2361@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2362Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2363[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2364
2365@kindex --major-os-version
2366@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2367Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2368[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2369
2370@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2371@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2372Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2373[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2374
2375@kindex --minor-image-version
2376@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2377Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2378[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2379
2380@kindex --minor-os-version
2381@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2382Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2383[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2384
2385@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2386@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2387Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2388[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2389
2390@cindex DEF files, creating
2391@cindex DLLs, creating
2392@kindex --output-def
2393@item --output-def @var{file}
2394The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2395file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2396(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2397library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2398automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2399[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2400
b044cda1
CW
2401@cindex DLLs, creating
2402@kindex --out-implib
2403@item --out-implib @var{file}
2404The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2405import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2406import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2407may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2408makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2409creation step.
bb10df36 2410[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2411
2412@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2413@item --enable-auto-image-base
2414Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2415using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2416from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2417collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2418avoided.
bb10df36 2419[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2420
2421@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2422@item --disable-auto-image-base
2423Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2424user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2425default.
bb10df36 2426[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2427
2428@cindex DLLs, linking to
2429@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2430@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2431When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2432search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2433@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2434between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2435uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2436@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2437[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2438
2439@kindex --enable-auto-import
2440@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2441Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2442DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2443building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2444'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2445to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2446specification published by Microsoft.
2447
e2a83dd0
NC
2448Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2449data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2450placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2451around a problem with consts that is described here:
2452http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2453
4d8907ac
DS
2454Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2455see this message:
0d888aac 2456
ece2d90e 2457"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2458documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2459
ece2d90e
NC
2460This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2461ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2462allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2463fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2464constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2465multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2466this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2467of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2468the warning, and exit.
2469
2470There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2471data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2472
2fa9fc65
NC
2473One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2474of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2475this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2476
c0065db7
RM
2477A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2478that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2479there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2480a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2481
2482@example
2483extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2484extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2485 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2486@end example
2487
2488or
2489
2490@example
2491extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2492extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2493 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2494@end example
2495
c0065db7 2496For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2497is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2498
2499@example
2500extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2501extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2502 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2503@end example
2504
c406afaf
NC
2505or
2506
2507@example
2508extern long long extern_ll;
2509extern_ll -->
2510 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2511@end example
2512
2fa9fc65 2513A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2514'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2515@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2516requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2517building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2518merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2519between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2520constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2521
2522Original:
2523@example
2524--foo.h
2525extern int arr[];
2526--foo.c
2527#include "foo.h"
2528void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2529 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2530@}
2531@end example
2532
2533Solution 1:
2534@example
2535--foo.h
2536extern int arr[];
2537--foo.c
2538#include "foo.h"
2539void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2540 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2541 volatile int *parr = arr;
2542 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2543@}
2544@end example
2545
2546Solution 2:
2547@example
2548--foo.h
2549/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2550#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2551 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2552#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2553#else
2554#define FOO_IMPORT
2555#endif
2556extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2557--foo.c
2558#include "foo.h"
2559void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2560 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2561@}
2562@end example
2563
c0065db7 2564A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2565library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2566for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2567functions).
bb10df36 2568[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2569
2570@kindex --disable-auto-import
2571@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2572Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2573@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2574[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2575
2fa9fc65
NC
2576@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2577@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2578If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2579that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2580a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2581environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2582[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2583
2584@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2585@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2586Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2587DLLs.
bb10df36 2588[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2589
b044cda1
CW
2590@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2591@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2592Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2593[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2594
252b5132
RH
2595@kindex --section-alignment
2596@item --section-alignment
2597Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2598addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2599[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2600
2601@cindex stack size
2602@kindex --stack
2603@item --stack @var{reserve}
2604@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2605Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2606to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2607committed.
bb10df36 2608[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2609
2610@kindex --subsystem
2611@item --subsystem @var{which}
2612@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2613@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2614Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2615legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2616@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2617the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2618@var{which}.
bb10df36 2619[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2620
2f563b51
DK
2621The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2622of the PE file header:
2623[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2624
2625@kindex --dynamicbase
2626@item --dynamicbase
2627The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2628randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2629Vista for i386 PE targets.
2630
2631@kindex --forceinteg
2632@item --forceinteg
2633Code integrity checks are enforced.
2634
2635@kindex --nxcompat
2636@item --nxcompat
2637The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2638This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2639
2640@kindex --no-isolation
2641@item --no-isolation
2642Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2643
2644@kindex --no-seh
2645@item --no-seh
2646The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2647this image.
2648
2649@kindex --no-bind
2650@item --no-bind
2651Do not bind this image.
2652
2653@kindex --wdmdriver
2654@item --wdmdriver
2655The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2656
2f563b51
DK
2657@kindex --tsaware
2658@item --tsaware
2659The image is Terminal Server aware.
2660
0cb112f7
CF
2661@kindex --insert-timestamp
2662@item --insert-timestamp
2663Insert a real timestamp into the image, rather than the default value
2664of zero. This will result in a slightly different results with each
2665invocation, which could be helpful for distributing unique images.
252b5132
RH
2666@end table
2667
0285c67d
NC
2668@c man end
2669
ac145307
BS
2670@ifset C6X
2671@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2672
2673@c man begin OPTIONS
2674
2675The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2676libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2677all executables use an index of 0.
2678
2679@table @gcctabopt
2680
2681@kindex --dsbt-size
2682@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2683This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2684or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2685entries.
2686
2687@kindex --dsbt-index
2688@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2689This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2690to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2691executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2692@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2693
fbd9ad90
PB
2694@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2695The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2696exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2697
ac145307
BS
2698@end table
2699
2700@c man end
2701@end ifset
2702
93fd0973
SC
2703@ifset M68HC11
2704@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2705
2706@c man begin OPTIONS
2707
2708The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2709memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2710
2711@table @gcctabopt
2712
2713@kindex --no-trampoline
2714@item --no-trampoline
2715This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2716is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2717instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2718
2719@kindex --bank-window
2720@item --bank-window @var{name}
2721This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2722the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2723The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2724paging and addresses within the memory window.
2725
2726@end table
2727
2728@c man end
2729@end ifset
2730
7fb9f789
NC
2731@ifset M68K
2732@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2733
2734@c man begin OPTIONS
2735
2736The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2737when linking for 68K targets.
2738
2739@table @gcctabopt
2740
2741@kindex --got
2742@item --got=@var{type}
2743This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2744@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2745@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2746Info entry for @file{ld}.
2747
2748@end table
2749
2750@c man end
2751@end ifset
2752
833794fc
MR
2753@ifset MIPS
2754@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2755
2756@c man begin OPTIONS
2757
2758The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2759generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2760
2761@table @gcctabopt
2762
2763@kindex --insn32
2764@item --insn32
2765@kindex --no-insn32
2766@itemx --no-insn32
2767These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2768generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2769or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
277032-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2771used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2772possible.
2773
2774@end table
2775
2776@c man end
2777@end ifset
2778
252b5132
RH
2779@ifset UsesEnvVars
2780@node Environment
2781@section Environment Variables
2782
0285c67d
NC
2783@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2784
560e09e9 2785You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2786@ifclear SingleFormat
2787@code{GNUTARGET},
2788@end ifclear
2789@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2790
36f63dca 2791@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2792@kindex GNUTARGET
2793@cindex default input format
2794@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2795use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2796of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2797@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2798of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2799attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2800this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2801there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2802object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2803BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2804in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2805@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2806
2807@kindex LDEMULATION
2808@cindex default emulation
2809@cindex emulation, default
2810@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2811@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2812behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2813available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2814the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2815variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2816linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2817
2818@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2819@cindex demangling, default
2820Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2821@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2822default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2823a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2824may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2825options.
2826
0285c67d
NC
2827@c man end
2828@end ifset
2829
252b5132
RH
2830@node Scripts
2831@chapter Linker Scripts
2832
2833@cindex scripts
2834@cindex linker scripts
2835@cindex command files
2836Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2837written in the linker command language.
2838
2839The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2840the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2841the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2842more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2843direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2844described below.
2845
2846The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2847yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2848linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2849to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2850such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2851
2852You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2853line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2854default linker script.
2855
2856You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2857to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2858Linker Scripts}.
2859
2860@menu
2861* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2862* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2863* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2864* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2865* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2866* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2867* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2868* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2869* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2870* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2871* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2872@end menu
2873
2874@node Basic Script Concepts
2875@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2876@cindex linker script concepts
2877We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2878describe the linker script language.
2879
2880The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2881file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2882@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2883The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2884purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2885among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2886section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2887in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2888
2889Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2890also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 2891contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
2892the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2893A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2894area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2895loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2896which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2897of debugging information.
2898
2899Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2900first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2901the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2902@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2903section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2904same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2905is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2906(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2907based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2908RAM address would be the VMA.
2909
2910You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2911program with the @samp{-h} option.
2912
2913Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2914@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2915has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2916information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2917will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2918static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2919referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2920
2921You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2922program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2923option.
2924
2925@node Script Format
2926@section Linker Script Format
2927@cindex linker script format
2928Linker scripts are text files.
2929
2930You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2931either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2932symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2933generally ignored.
2934
2935Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2936If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2937otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2938double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2939file name.
2940
2941You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2942@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2943to whitespace.
2944
2945@node Simple Example
2946@section Simple Linker Script Example
2947@cindex linker script example
2948@cindex example of linker script
2949Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2950
2951The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2952@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2953memory layout of the output file.
2954
2955The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2956describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2957code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2958@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2959Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2960your input files.
2961
2962For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
29630x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2964linker script which will do that:
2965@smallexample
2966SECTIONS
2967@{
2968 . = 0x10000;
2969 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2970 . = 0x8000000;
2971 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2972 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2973@}
2974@end smallexample
2975
2976You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2977followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2978descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2979
252b5132
RH
2980The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2981sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2982counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2983other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2984current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2985incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2986@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2987
2988The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2989required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2990after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2991which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2992wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2993means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2994
2995Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2996@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2997@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2998
2999The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3000the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3001at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3002output section, the value of the location counter will be
3003@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3004effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3005immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3006
3007The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3008alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3009example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3010sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3011may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3012sections.
3013
3014That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3015
3016@node Simple Commands
3017@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3018@cindex linker script simple commands
3019In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3020
3021@menu
3022* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3023* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3024@ifclear SingleFormat
3025* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3026@end ifclear
3027
4a93e180 3028* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3029* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3030@end menu
3031
3032@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3033@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3034@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3035@cindex start of execution
3036@cindex first instruction
3037@cindex entry point
3038The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3039point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3040entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3041@smallexample
3042ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3043@end smallexample
3044
3045There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3046entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3047stopping when one of them succeeds:
3048@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3049@item
252b5132 3050the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3051@item
252b5132 3052the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3053@item
3ab904c4
NC
3054the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3055targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3056check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3057@item
252b5132 3058the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3059@item
252b5132
RH
3060The address @code{0}.
3061@end itemize
3062
3063@node File Commands
36f63dca 3064@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3065@cindex linker script file commands
3066Several linker script commands deal with files.
3067
3068@table @code
3069@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3070@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3071@cindex including a linker script
3072Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3073be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3074with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
307510 levels deep.
3076
4006703d
NS
3077You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3078@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3079
252b5132
RH
3080@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3081@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3082@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3083@cindex input files in linker scripts
3084@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3085@cindex linker script input object files
3086The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3087in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3088
3089For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3090a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3091then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3092
3093In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3094script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3095
e3f2db7f
AO
3096In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3097with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3098located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3099for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3100open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3101linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
3102description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3103
ff5dcc92 3104If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3105name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3106@samp{-l}.
3107
3108When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3109files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3110script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3111
3112@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3113@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3114@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3115@cindex grouping input files
3116The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3117files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3118new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3119in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3120
b717d30e
JJ
3121@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3122@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3123@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3124This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3125commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3126as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3127with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3128when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3129@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3130and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3131setting afterwards.
3132
252b5132
RH
3133@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3134@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3135@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3136The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3137@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3138@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3139Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3140precedence.
3141
3142You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3143output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3144
3145@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3146@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3147@cindex library search path in linker script
3148@cindex archive search path in linker script
3149@cindex search path in linker script
3150The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3151@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3152@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3153on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3154are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3155the command line option are searched first.
3156
3157@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3158@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3159@cindex first input file
3160The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3161that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3162though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3163when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3164first file.
3165@end table
3166
3167@ifclear SingleFormat
3168@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3169@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3170A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3171
3172@table @code
3173@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3174@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3175@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3176@cindex output file format in linker script
3177The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3178output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3179exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3180(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3181line option takes precedence.
3182
3183You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3184formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3185This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3186desired endianness.
3187
3188If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3189will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3190output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3191used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3192
3193For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3194command:
3195@smallexample
3196OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3197@end smallexample
3198This says that the default format for the output file is
3199@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3200option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3201format.
3202
3203@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3204@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3205@cindex input file format in linker script
3206The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3207files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3208This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3209(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3210is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3211command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3212@end table
3213@end ifclear
3214
4a93e180
NC
3215@node REGION_ALIAS
3216@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3217@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3218@cindex region alias
3219@cindex region names
3220
3221Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3222@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3223
3224@smallexample
3225REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3226@end smallexample
3227
3228The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3229memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3230to memory regions. An example follows.
3231
3232Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3233memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3234that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3235non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3236access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3237read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3238sections:
3239
3240@itemize @bullet
3241@item
3242@code{.text} program code;
3243@item
3244@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3245@item
3246@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3247@item
3248@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3249@end itemize
3250
3251The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3252part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3253output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3254systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3255@code{C}:
3256@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3257@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3258@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3259@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3260@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3261@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3262@end multitable
3263The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3264loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3265the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3266the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3267
3268The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3269includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3270memory layout:
3271@smallexample
3272INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3273
3274SECTIONS
3275 @{
3276 .text :
3277 @{
3278 *(.text)
3279 @} > REGION_TEXT
3280 .rodata :
3281 @{
3282 *(.rodata)
3283 rodata_end = .;
3284 @} > REGION_RODATA
3285 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3286 @{
3287 data_start = .;
3288 *(.data)
3289 @} > REGION_DATA
3290 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3291 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3292 .bss :
3293 @{
3294 *(.bss)
3295 @} > REGION_BSS
3296 @}
3297@end smallexample
3298
3299Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3300regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3301variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3302@table @code
3303@item A
3304Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3305@smallexample
3306MEMORY
3307 @{
3308 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3309 @}
3310
3311REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3312REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3313REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3314REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3315@end smallexample
3316@item B
3317Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3318into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3319@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3320@smallexample
3321MEMORY
3322 @{
3323 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3324 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3325 @}
3326
3327REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3328REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3329REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3330REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3331@end smallexample
3332@item C
3333Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3334@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3335initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3336system start into the @code{RAM}.
3337@smallexample
3338MEMORY
3339 @{
3340 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3341 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3342 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3343 @}
3344
3345REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3346REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3347REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3348REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3349@end smallexample
3350@end table
3351
3352It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3353@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3354necessary:
3355@smallexample
3356#include <string.h>
3357
3358extern char data_start [];
3359extern char data_size [];
3360extern char data_load_start [];
3361
3362void copy_data(void)
3363@{
3364 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3365 @{
3366 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3367 @}
3368@}
3369@end smallexample
3370
252b5132 3371@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3372@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3373There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3374
3375@table @code
3376@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3377@kindex ASSERT
3378@cindex assertion in linker script
3379Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3380with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3381
3382@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3383@kindex EXTERN
3384@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3385Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3386symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3387modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3388each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3389command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3390
3391@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3392@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3393@cindex common allocation in linker script
3394This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3395to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3396output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3397
4818e05f
AM
3398@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3399@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3400@cindex common allocation in linker script
3401This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3402command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3403to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3404
53d25da6
AM
3405@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3406@kindex INSERT
3407@cindex insert user script into default script
3408This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3409augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3410inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3411@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3412default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3413sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3414linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3415insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3416linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3417default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3418of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3419to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3420is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3421
3422@smallexample
3423SECTIONS
3424@{
3425 OVERLAY :
3426 @{
3427 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3428 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3429 @}
3430@}
3431INSERT AFTER .text;
3432@end smallexample
3433
252b5132
RH
3434@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3435@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3436@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3437This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3438references among certain output sections.
3439
3440In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3441using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3442will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3443errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3444a function defined in the other section.
3445
3446The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3447@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3448an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3449@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3450names.
3451
3452@ifclear SingleFormat
3453@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3454@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3455@cindex machine architecture
3456@cindex architecture
3457Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3458of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3459architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3460the @samp{-f} option.
3461@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3462
3463@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3464@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3465This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3466@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3467in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3468@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3469@end table
3470
3471@node Assignments
3472@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3473@cindex assignment in scripts
3474@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3475@cindex variables, defining
3476You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3477the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3478
3479@menu
3480* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3481* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3482* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3483* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3484* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3485@end menu
3486
3487@node Simple Assignments
3488@subsection Simple Assignments
3489
3490You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3491
3492@table @code
3493@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3494@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3495@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3496@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3497@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3498@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3499@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3500@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3501@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3502@end table
3503
3504The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3505@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3506defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3507
3508The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3509may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3510
3511The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3512
3513Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3514
3515You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3516statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3517section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3518
3519The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3520expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3521
3522Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3523assignments may be used:
3524
3525@smallexample
3526floating_point = 0;
3527SECTIONS
3528@{
3529 .text :
3530 @{
3531 *(.text)
3532 _etext = .;
3533 @}
156e34dd 3534 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3535 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3536@}
3537@end smallexample
3538@noindent
3539In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3540zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3541the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3542defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3543upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3544
eb8476a6
MR
3545@node HIDDEN
3546@subsection HIDDEN
3547@cindex HIDDEN
3548For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3549exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3550
3551Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3552@code{HIDDEN}:
3553
3554@smallexample
3555HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3556SECTIONS
3557@{
3558 .text :
3559 @{
3560 *(.text)
3561 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3562 @}
3563 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3564 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3565@}
3566@end smallexample
3567@noindent
3568In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3569
252b5132
RH
3570@node PROVIDE
3571@subsection PROVIDE
3572@cindex PROVIDE
3573In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3574only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3575the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3576@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3577@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3578@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3579@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3580@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3581
3582Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3583@smallexample
3584SECTIONS
3585@{
3586 .text :
3587 @{
3588 *(.text)
3589 _etext = .;
3590 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3591 @}
3592@}
3593@end smallexample
3594
3595In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3596underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3597the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3598underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3599If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3600linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3601
7af8e998
L
3602@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3603@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3604@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3605Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3606hidden and won't be exported.
3607
73ae6183
NC
3608@node Source Code Reference
3609@subsection Source Code Reference
3610
3611Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3612intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3613a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3614symbol that does not have a value.
3615
3616Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3617transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3618stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3619prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3620mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3621of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3622variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3623linker script variable might be referred to as:
3624
3625@smallexample
3626 extern int foo;
3627@end smallexample
3628
3629But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3630
3631@smallexample
3632 _foo = 1000;
3633@end smallexample
3634
3635In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3636transformation has taken place.
3637
3638When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3639things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3640in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3641second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3642table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3643contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3644value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3645
3646@smallexample
3647 int foo = 1000;
3648@end smallexample
3649
10bf6894 3650creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
3651holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3652number 1000 is initially stored.
3653
3654When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3655first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3656memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3657So:
3658
3659@smallexample
3660 foo = 1;
3661@end smallexample
3662
3663looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3664associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3665address. Whereas:
3666
3667@smallexample
3668 int * a = & foo;
3669@end smallexample
3670
10bf6894 3671looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
3672and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3673the variable @samp{a}.
3674
3675Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3676the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3677an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3678
3679@smallexample
3680 foo = 1000;
3681@end smallexample
3682
3683creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3684the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3685address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3686linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3687access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3688
3689Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3690you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3691use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3692section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3693linker script contains these declarations:
3694
3695@smallexample
3696@group
3697 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3698 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3699 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3700@end group
3701@end smallexample
3702
3703Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3704
3705@smallexample
3706@group
3707 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3708
73ae6183
NC
3709 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3710@end group
3711@end smallexample
3712
3713Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3714
252b5132 3715@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3716@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3717@kindex SECTIONS
3718The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3719into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3720
3721The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3722@smallexample
3723SECTIONS
3724@{
3725 @var{sections-command}
3726 @var{sections-command}
3727 @dots{}
3728@}
3729@end smallexample
3730
3731Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3732
3733@itemize @bullet
3734@item
3735an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3736@item
3737a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3738@item
3739an output section description
3740@item
3741an overlay description
3742@end itemize
3743
3744The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3745@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3746those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3747understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3748the layout of the output file.
3749
3750Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3751below.
3752
3753If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3754linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3755section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3756input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3757example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3758in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3759
3760@menu
3761* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3762* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3763* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3764* Input Section:: Input section description
3765* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3766* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3767* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3768* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3769* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3770@end menu
3771
3772@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3773@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3774The full description of an output section looks like this:
3775@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3776@group
7e7d5768 3777@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 3778 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 3779 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
3780 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3781 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3782 @{
3783 @var{output-section-command}
3784 @var{output-section-command}
3785 @dots{}
562d3460 3786 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3787@end group
3788@end smallexample
3789
3790Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3791
3792The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3793name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3794The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3795
3796Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3797
3798@itemize @bullet
3799@item
3800a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3801@item
3802an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3803@item
3804data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3805@item
3806a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3807@end itemize
3808
3809@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3810@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3811@cindex name, section
3812@cindex section name
3813The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3814meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3815support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3816must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3817example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3818output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3819names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3820quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3821characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3822commas must be quoted.
3823
3824The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3825Discarding}.
3826
3827@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3828@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3829@cindex address, section
3830@cindex section address
3831The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
3832address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3833is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3834
3835If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3836section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3837to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3838alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3839contained within the output section.
3840
3841The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3842
3843@itemize @bullet
3844@item
3845If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3846is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3847in that region.
3848
3849@item
3850If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3851regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3852section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3853be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3854
3855@item
3856If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3857the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3858counter.
3859@end itemize
3860
3861@noindent
3862For example:
3863
252b5132
RH
3864@smallexample
3865.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3866@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3867
252b5132
RH
3868@noindent
3869and
ea5cae92 3870
252b5132
RH
3871@smallexample
3872.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3873@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3874
252b5132
RH
3875@noindent
3876are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3877@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3878counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
3879counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3880input sections.
252b5132
RH
3881
3882The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3883For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3884so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3885do something like this:
3886@smallexample
3887.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3888@end smallexample
3889@noindent
3890This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3891aligned upward to the specified value.
3892
3893Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
3894location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3895sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
3896
3897@node Input Section
36f63dca 3898@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3899@cindex input sections
3900@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3901The most common output section command is an input section description.
3902
3903The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3904You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3905in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3906map the input files into your memory layout.
3907
3908@menu
3909* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3910* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3911* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3912* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3913* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3914@end menu
3915
3916@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3917@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3918@cindex input section basics
3919An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3920by a list of section names in parentheses.
3921
3922The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3923describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3924
3925The most common input section description is to include all input
3926sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3927include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3928@smallexample
3929*(.text)
3930@end smallexample
3931@noindent
18625d54
CM
3932Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3933of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3934match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3935example:
252b5132 3936@smallexample
b4346c09 3937*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3938@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3939will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3940@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3941
3942There are two ways to include more than one section:
3943@smallexample
3944*(.text .rdata)
3945*(.text) *(.rdata)
3946@end smallexample
3947@noindent
3948The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3949@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3950first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3951they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3952@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3953@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3954
3955You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3956You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3957needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3958@smallexample
3959data.o(.data)
3960@end smallexample
3961
ae17ab41
CM
3962To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
3963of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
3964
3965Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
3966
3967@smallexample
3968@group
3969SECTIONS @{
3970 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
3971 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
3972@}
3973@end group
3974@end smallexample
3975
3976In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
3977input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
3978@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
3979@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
3980whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
3981
967928e9
AM
3982You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3983matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3984with no whitespace around the colon.
3985
3986@table @samp
3987@item archive:file
3988matches file within archive
3989@item archive:
3990matches the whole archive
3991@item :file
3992matches file but not one in an archive
3993@end table
3994
3995Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3996wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3997single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3998@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3999within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4000also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4001other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4002from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4003command.
4004
252b5132
RH
4005If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4006the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4007commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4008@smallexample
4009data.o
4010@end smallexample
4011
967928e9
AM
4012When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4013and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4014characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4015name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4016did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4017though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4018@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4019the archive search path.
4020
4021@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4022@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4023@cindex input section wildcards
4024@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4025@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4026@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4027In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4028name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4029
4030The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4031pattern for the file name.
4032
4033The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4034
4035@table @samp
4036@item *
4037matches any number of characters
4038@item ?
4039matches any single character
4040@item [@var{chars}]
4041matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4042character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4043@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4044@item \
4045quotes the following character
4046@end table
4047
4048When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4049will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4050Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4051exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4052@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4053a @samp{/} character.
4054
4055File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4056specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4057does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4058
4059If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4060appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4061will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4062sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4063@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4064@smallexample
4065.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4066.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4067@end smallexample
4068
bcaa7b3e 4069@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4070Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4071in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4072this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4073pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4074@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4075into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4076
bcaa7b3e
L
4077@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4078@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4079difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4080descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4081Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4082reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4083
02ecc8e9
L
4084@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4085@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4086difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4087ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4088encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4089
bcaa7b3e
L
4090@cindex SORT
4091@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4092
4093When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4094can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4095
4096@enumerate
4097@item
4098@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4099It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4100sections have the same name.
4101@item
4102@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4103It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4104sections have the same alignment.
4105@item
c0065db7 4106@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4107treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4108@item
4109@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4110is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4111@item
4112All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4113@end enumerate
4114
4115When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4116section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4117takes precedence over the command line option.
4118
4119If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4120command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4121treated as nested sorting command.
4122
4123@enumerate
4124@item
4125@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4126@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4127@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4128@item
4129@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4130@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4131@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4132@end enumerate
4133
4134If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4135command line option will be ignored.
4136
eda680f8
L
4137@cindex SORT_NONE
4138@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4139section sorting option.
4140
252b5132
RH
4141If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4142@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4143precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4144
4145This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4146files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4147sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4148The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4149with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4150linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4151@smallexample
4152@group
4153SECTIONS @{
4154 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4155 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4156 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4157 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4158@}
4159@end group
4160@end smallexample
4161
4162@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4163@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4164@cindex common symbol placement
4165@cindex uninitialized data placement
4166A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4167file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4168linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4169named @samp{COMMON}.
4170
4171You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4172other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4173particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4174input files are placed in another section.
4175
4176In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4177@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4178@smallexample
4179.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4180@end smallexample
4181
4182@cindex scommon section
4183@cindex small common symbols
4184Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4185example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4186symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4187different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4188the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4189symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4190to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4191locations.
4192
4193@cindex [COMMON]
4194You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4195notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4196@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4197
4198@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4199@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4200@cindex KEEP
4201@cindex garbage collection
4202When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4203it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4204This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4205with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4206@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4207
4208@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4209@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4210The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4211to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4212start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4213@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4214follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4215@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4216@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4217All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4218files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4219
4220@smallexample
4221@group
4222SECTIONS @{
4223 outputa 0x10000 :
4224 @{
4225 all.o
4226 foo.o (.input1)
4227 @}
36f63dca
NC
4228@end group
4229@group
252b5132
RH
4230 outputb :
4231 @{
4232 foo.o (.input2)
4233 foo1.o (.input1)
4234 @}
36f63dca
NC
4235@end group
4236@group
252b5132
RH
4237 outputc :
4238 @{
4239 *(.input1)
4240 *(.input2)
4241 @}
4242@}
4243@end group
a1ab1d2a 4244@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4245
4246@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4247@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4248@cindex data
4249@cindex section data
4250@cindex output section data
4251@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4252@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4253@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4254@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4255@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4256You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4257@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4258an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4259parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4260value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4261counter.
4262
4263The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4264store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4265bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4266stored.
4267
4268For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4269of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4270@smallexample
4271BYTE(1)
4272LONG(addr)
4273@end smallexample
4274
4275When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4276same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4277target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4278@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4279@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4280
4281If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4282which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4283When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4284true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4285endianness of the first input object file.
4286
36f63dca 4287Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4288between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4289@smallexample
4290SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4291@end smallexample
4292whereas this will work:
4293@smallexample
4294SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4295@end smallexample
4296
252b5132
RH
4297@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4298@cindex holes, filling
4299@cindex unspecified memory
4300You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4301current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4302otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4303gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4304with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4305necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4306point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4307than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4308different parts of an output section.
4309
4310This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4311value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4312@smallexample
563e308f 4313FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4314@end smallexample
4315
4316The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4317section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4318part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4319entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4320precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4321expression.
252b5132
RH
4322
4323@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4324@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4325There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4326commands.
4327
4328@table @code
4329@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4330@cindex input filename symbols
4331@cindex filename symbols
4332@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4333The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4334The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4335file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4336the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4337
4338This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4339normally used for any other object file format.
4340
4341@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4342@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4343@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4344@item CONSTRUCTORS
4345When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4346unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4347destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4348arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4349automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4350For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4351linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4352@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4353ignored for other object file formats.
4354
4355The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4356constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4357Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4358the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4359first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4360of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4361compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4362formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4363@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4364the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4365destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4366@code{exit}.
4367
4368For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4369arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4370addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4371and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4372linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4373runtime code expects to see.
4374
4375@smallexample
4376 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4377 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4378 *(.ctors)
4379 LONG(0)
4380 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4381 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4382 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4383 *(.dtors)
4384 LONG(0)
4385 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4386@end smallexample
4387
4388If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4389which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4390are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4391are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4392command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4393@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4394@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4395@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4396
4397Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4398and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4399need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4400scripts.
4401
4402@end table
4403
4404@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4405@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4406@cindex discarding sections
4407@cindex sections, discarding
4408@cindex removing sections
74541ad4
AM
4409The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4410for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4411be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4412@smallexample
49c13adb 4413.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4414@end smallexample
4415@noindent
4416will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4417@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4418sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4419space in an output section will also create the output section.
4420
a0976ea4 4421The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4422on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4423symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4424the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4425section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4426
4427@cindex /DISCARD/
4428The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4429input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4430section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4431
4432@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4433@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4434@cindex output section attributes
4435We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4436like this:
0c71d759 4437
252b5132 4438@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4439@group
7e7d5768 4440@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4441 [AT(@var{lma})]
4442 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4443 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4444 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4445 @{
4446 @var{output-section-command}
4447 @var{output-section-command}
4448 @dots{}
562d3460 4449 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4450@end group
4451@end smallexample
0c71d759 4452
252b5132
RH
4453We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4454@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4455remaining section attributes.
4456
a1ab1d2a 4457@menu
252b5132
RH
4458* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4459* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4460* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4461* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4462* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4463* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4464* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4465* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4466@end menu
4467
4468@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4469@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4470Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4471parentheses. The following types are defined:
4472
4473@table @code
4474@item NOLOAD
4475The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4476loaded into memory when the program is run.
4477@item DSECT
4478@itemx COPY
4479@itemx INFO
4480@itemx OVERLAY
4481These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4482rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4483marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4484section when the program is run.
4485@end table
4486
4487@kindex NOLOAD
4488@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4489@cindex loading, preventing
4490The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4491the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4492the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4493@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4494need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4495@smallexample
4496@group
4497SECTIONS @{
4498 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4499 @dots{}
4500@}
4501@end group
4502@end smallexample
4503
4504@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4505@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4506@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4507@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4508@cindex load address
4509@cindex section load address
4510Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4511@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4512@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4513specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4514address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4515
ea5cae92
NC
4516The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4517specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4518takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4519load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4520region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4521
4522If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4523section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4524load address:
4525
4526@itemize @bullet
4527@item
4528If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4529the LMA address as well.
4530
4531@item
4532If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4533
4534@item
4535Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4536with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4537section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4538VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4539the last section in the located region.
4540
4541@item
4542If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4543that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4544
4545@item
4546If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4547section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4548@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4549
4550@cindex ROM initialized data
4551@cindex initialized data in ROM
4552This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4553example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4554called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4555@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4556even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4557uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4558defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4559counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4560
4561@smallexample
4562@group
4563SECTIONS
4564 @{
4565 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4566 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4567 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4568 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4569 .bss 0x3000 :
4570 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4571@}
4572@end group
4573@end smallexample
4574
4575The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4576this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4577the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4578how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4579script.
4580
4581@smallexample
4582@group
4583extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4584char *src = &_etext;
4585char *dst = &_data;
4586
ea5cae92
NC
4587/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4588while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4589 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4590
ea5cae92 4591/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4592for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4593 *dst = 0;
4594@end group
4595@end smallexample
4596
bbf115d3
L
4597@node Forced Output Alignment
4598@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4599@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4600@cindex forcing output section alignment
4601@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e
NC
4602You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
4603alternative you can force the output section alignment to the maximum alignment
4604of all its input sections with ALIGN_WITH_INPUT. The alignment forced by
4605ALIGN_WITH_INPUT is used even in case the load and virtual memory regions are
4606different.
bbf115d3 4607
7e7d5768
AM
4608@node Forced Input Alignment
4609@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4610@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4611@cindex forcing input section alignment
4612@cindex input section alignment
4613You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4614SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4615sections, whether larger or smaller.
4616
0c71d759
NC
4617@node Output Section Constraint
4618@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4619@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4620@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4621@cindex constraints on output sections
4622You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4623of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4624read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4625@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4626
252b5132 4627@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4628@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4629@kindex >@var{region}
4630@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4631@cindex memory regions and sections
4632You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4633using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4634
4635Here is a simple example:
4636@smallexample
4637@group
4638MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4639SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4640@end group
4641@end smallexample
4642
4643@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4644@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4645@kindex :@var{phdr}
4646@cindex section, assigning to program header
4647@cindex program headers and sections
4648You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4649using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4650one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4651assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4652@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4653linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4654
4655Here is a simple example:
4656@smallexample
4657@group
4658PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4659SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4660@end group
4661@end smallexample
4662
4663@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4664@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4665@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4666@cindex section fill pattern
4667@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4668You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4669@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4670(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4671within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4672alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4673necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4674of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4675an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4676fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4677other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4678pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4679expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4680
4681You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4682output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4683
4684Here is a simple example:
4685@smallexample
4686@group
563e308f 4687SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4688@end group
4689@end smallexample
4690
4691@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4692@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4693@kindex OVERLAY
4694@cindex overlays
4695An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4696are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4697the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4698copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4699required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4700can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4701than another.
4702
4703Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4704@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4705output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4706command is as follows:
4707@smallexample
4708@group
4709OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4710 @{
4711 @var{secname1}
4712 @{
4713 @var{output-section-command}
4714 @var{output-section-command}
4715 @dots{}
4716 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4717 @var{secname2}
4718 @{
4719 @var{output-section-command}
4720 @var{output-section-command}
4721 @dots{}
4722 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4723 @dots{}
4724 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4725@end group
4726@end smallexample
4727
4728Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4729section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4730section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 4731those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
4732except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4733sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4734
4735The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4736addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4737memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4738whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4739and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4740and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4741
56dd11f0
NC
4742If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4743references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4744the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4745sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4746@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
4747
4748For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4749provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4750defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4751@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4752the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4753within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4754symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4755
4756At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4757the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4758
4759Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4760@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4761@smallexample
4762@group
4763 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4764 @{
4765 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4766 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4767 @}
4768@end group
4769@end smallexample
4770@noindent
4771This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4772address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4773@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4774following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4775@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4776@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4777
4778C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4779like the following.
4780
4781@smallexample
4782@group
4783 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4784 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4785 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4786@end group
4787@end smallexample
4788
4789Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4790everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4791example could have been written identically as follows.
4792
4793@smallexample
4794@group
4795 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4796 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4797 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4798 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4799 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4800 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4801 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4802@end group
4803@end smallexample
4804
4805@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4806@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4807@kindex MEMORY
4808@cindex memory regions
4809@cindex regions of memory
4810@cindex allocating memory
4811@cindex discontinuous memory
4812The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4813memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4814
4815The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4816memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4817may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4818can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4819set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4820regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4821around to fit into the available regions.
4822
4823A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4824command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4825you wish. The syntax is:
4826@smallexample
4827@group
a1ab1d2a 4828MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4829 @{
4830 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4831 @dots{}
4832 @}
4833@end group
4834@end smallexample
4835
4836The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4837region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4838Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4839with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4840must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4841add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 4842command.
252b5132
RH
4843
4844@cindex memory region attributes
4845The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4846whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4847not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4848@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4849section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4850the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4851them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4852
4853The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4854@table @samp
4855@item R
4856Read-only section
4857@item W
4858Read/write section
4859@item X
4860Executable section
4861@item A
4862Allocatable section
4863@item I
4864Initialized section
4865@item L
4866Same as @samp{I}
4867@item !
c09e9a8c 4868Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
4869@end table
4870
4871If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4872@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4873attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4874in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4875attributes.
4876
4877@kindex ORIGIN =
4878@kindex o =
4879@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4880The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4881the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4882cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4883abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4884@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4885
4886@kindex LENGTH =
4887@kindex len =
4888@kindex l =
4889The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4890region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4891be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4892@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4893
4894In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4895available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4896and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4897linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4898is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4899or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4900explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4901region.
4902
4903@smallexample
4904@group
a1ab1d2a 4905MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4906 @{
4907 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4908 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4909 @}
4910@end group
4911@end smallexample
4912
4913Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4914specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4915@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4916a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4917output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4918was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4919the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4920output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4921region, the linker will issue an error message.
4922
3ec57632 4923It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4924expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4925@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4926
4927@smallexample
4928@group
c0065db7 4929 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4930@end group
4931@end smallexample
4932
252b5132
RH
4933@node PHDRS
4934@section PHDRS Command
4935@kindex PHDRS
4936@cindex program headers
4937@cindex ELF program headers
4938@cindex program segments
4939@cindex segments, ELF
4940The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4941@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4942loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4943program with the @samp{-p} option.
4944
4945When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4946reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4947program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4948This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4949interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4950
4951The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4952in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4953precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4954the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4955not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4956
4957The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4958generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4959ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4960
4961This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4962@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4963
4964@smallexample
4965@group
4966PHDRS
4967@{
4968 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4969 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4970@}
4971@end group
4972@end smallexample
4973
4974The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4975of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4976header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4977with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
4978must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
4979is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
4980
4981Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4982system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4983specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4984sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4985attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4986Section Phdr}.
4987
4988It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4989merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4990repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4991contain the section.
4992
4993If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4994then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4995not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4996convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4997placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4998default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4999segment at all.
5000
5001@kindex FILEHDR
5002@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5003You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5004the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5005The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5006file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5007include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5008segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5009these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5010
5011The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5012value of the keyword.
5013
5014@table @asis
5015@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5016Indicates an unused program header.
5017
5018@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5019Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5020the file.
5021
5022@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5023Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5024
5025@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5026Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5027found.
5028
5029@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5030Indicates a segment holding note information.
5031
5032@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5033A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5034ABI.
5035
5036@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5037Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5038
5039@item @var{expression}
5040An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5041be used for types not defined above.
5042@end table
5043
5044You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5045in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5046@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5047Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5048output section attribute.
5049
5050The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5051which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5052explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5053an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5054header.
5055
5056Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5057headers used on a native ELF system.
5058
5059@example
5060@group
5061PHDRS
5062@{
5063 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5064 interp PT_INTERP ;
5065 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5066 data PT_LOAD ;
5067 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5068@}
5069
5070SECTIONS
5071@{
5072 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5073 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5074 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5075 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5076 @dots{}
5077 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5078 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5079 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5080 @dots{}
5081@}
5082@end group
5083@end example
5084
5085@node VERSION
5086@section VERSION Command
5087@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5088@cindex symbol versions
5089@cindex version script
5090@cindex versions of symbols
5091The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5092only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5093symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5094a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5095shared library.
5096
5097You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5098you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5099also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5100
5101The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5102@smallexample
5103VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5104@end smallexample
5105
5106The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5107Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5108version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5109version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5110version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5111scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5112library.
5113
5114The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5115examples.
5116
5117@smallexample
5118VERS_1.1 @{
5119 global:
5120 foo1;
5121 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5122 old*;
5123 original*;
5124 new*;
252b5132
RH
5125@};
5126
5127VERS_1.2 @{
5128 foo2;
5129@} VERS_1.1;
5130
5131VERS_2.0 @{
5132 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5133 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5134 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5135 "f(int, double)";
5136 @};
252b5132
RH
5137@} VERS_1.2;
5138@end smallexample
5139
5140This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5141version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5142The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5143a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5144of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5145symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5146is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5147in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5148However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5149name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5150
5151Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5152depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5153to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5154
5155Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5156depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5157and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5158
5159When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5160specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5161unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5162unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5163somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5164wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5165wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5166set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5167ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5168
5169The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5170they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5171could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5172However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5173
0f6bf451 5174Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5175in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5176symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5177won't.
5178
5179@smallexample
7c9c73be 5180@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5181@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5182
252b5132
RH
5183When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5184symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5185requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5186shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5187loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5188linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5189application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5190way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5191all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5192search for each symbol reference.
5193
5194The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5195doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5196that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5197functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5198the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5199required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5200that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5201versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5202the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5203
5204There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5205first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5206source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5207script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5208maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5209@smallexample
5210__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5211@end smallexample
5212@noindent
5213in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5214be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5215The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5216@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5217takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5218
5219The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5220function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5221an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5222version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5223linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5224
5225To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5226source file. Here is an example:
5227
5228@smallexample
5229__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5230__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5231__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5232__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5233@end smallexample
5234
5235In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5236unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5237example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5238@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5239
5240When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5241some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5242this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5243@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5244declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5245you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5246
5247If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5248within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5249(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5250specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5251
cb840a31
L
5252You can also specify the language in the version script:
5253
5254@smallexample
5255VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5256@end smallexample
5257
c0065db7 5258The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5259The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5260demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5261patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5262@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5263
86043bbb
MM
5264Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5265described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5266or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5267the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5268whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5269cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5270might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5271should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5272expect when you upgrade.
5273
252b5132
RH
5274@node Expressions
5275@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5276@cindex expressions
5277@cindex arithmetic
5278The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5279that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5280expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5281host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5282
5283You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5284
5285The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5286expressions.
5287
5288@menu
5289* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5290* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5291* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5292* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5293* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5294* Operators:: Operators
5295* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5296* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5297* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5298@end menu
5299
5300@node Constants
5301@subsection Constants
5302@cindex integer notation
5303@cindex constants in linker scripts
5304All constants are integers.
5305
5306As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5307octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5308hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5309@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5310@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5311value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5312
5313@cindex scaled integers
5314@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5315@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5316@cindex suffixes for integers
5317@cindex integer suffixes
5318In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5319constant by
5320@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5321@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5322@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5323@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5324@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5325@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5326@tex
5327${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5328@end tex
5329@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5330respectively. For example, the following
5331all refer to the same quantity:
5332
252b5132 5333@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5334_fourk_1 = 4K;
5335_fourk_2 = 4096;
5336_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5337_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5338@end smallexample
5339
8a308ae8
NC
5340Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5341conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5342
0c71d759
NC
5343@node Symbolic Constants
5344@subsection Symbolic Constants
5345@cindex symbolic constants
5346@kindex CONSTANT
5347It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5348the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5349
5350@table @code
5351@item MAXPAGESIZE
5352@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5353The target's maximum page size.
5354
5355@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5356@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5357The target's default page size.
5358@end table
5359
5360So for example:
5361
5362@smallexample
9d5777a3 5363 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5364@end smallexample
5365
5366will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5367supported by the target.
5368
252b5132
RH
5369@node Symbols
5370@subsection Symbol Names
5371@cindex symbol names
5372@cindex names
5373@cindex quoted symbol names
5374@kindex "
5375Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5376and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5377Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5378specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5379keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5380@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5381"SECTION" = 9;
5382"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5383@end smallexample
5384
5385Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5386to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5387whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5388
ecca9871
L
5389@node Orphan Sections
5390@subsection Orphan Sections
5391@cindex orphan
5392Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5393are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5394script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5395output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5396placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5397attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5398same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5399If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5400at the end of the file.
5401
5402For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5403well as section flag.
5404
41911f68 5405If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5406the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5407__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5408section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5409orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5410representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5411character.
5412
252b5132
RH
5413@node Location Counter
5414@subsection The Location Counter
5415@kindex .
5416@cindex dot
5417@cindex location counter
5418@cindex current output location
5419The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5420current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5421location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5422within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5423anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5424
5425@cindex holes
5426Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5427moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5428location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5429and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5430doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5431
5432@smallexample
5433SECTIONS
5434@{
5435 output :
5436 @{
5437 file1(.text)
5438 . = . + 1000;
5439 file2(.text)
5440 . += 1000;
5441 file3(.text)
563e308f 5442 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5443@}
5444@end smallexample
5445@noindent
5446In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5447located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5448followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5449@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5450@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5451specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5452
5c6bbab8
NC
5453@cindex dot inside sections
5454Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5455current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5456statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5457absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5458however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5459not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5460
5461@smallexample
5462SECTIONS
5463@{
5464 . = 0x100
5465 .text: @{
5466 *(.text)
5467 . = 0x200
5468 @}
5469 . = 0x500
5470 .data: @{
5471 *(.data)
5472 . += 0x600
5473 @}
5474@}
5475@end smallexample
5476
5477The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5478and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5479the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5480much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5481move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5482and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5483the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5484the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5485
b5666f2f
AM
5486@cindex dot outside sections
5487Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5488output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5489needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5490
5491@smallexample
5492SECTIONS
5493@{
5494 start_of_text = . ;
5495 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5496 end_of_text = . ;
5497
5498 start_of_data = . ;
5499 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5500 end_of_data = . ;
5501@}
5502@end smallexample
5503
5504If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5505not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5506between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5507should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5508blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5509the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5510sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5511statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5512special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5513place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5514as follows:
5515
5516@smallexample
5517SECTIONS
5518@{
5519 start_of_text = . ;
5520 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5521 end_of_text = . ;
5522
5523 start_of_data = . ;
5524 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5525 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5526 end_of_data = . ;
5527@}
5528@end smallexample
5529
5530This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5531@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5532placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5533assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5534a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5535section. So you could write:
5536
5537@smallexample
5538SECTIONS
5539@{
5540 start_of_text = . ;
5541 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5542 end_of_text = . ;
5543
5544 . = . ;
5545 start_of_data = . ;
5546 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5547 end_of_data = . ;
5548@}
5549@end smallexample
5550
5551Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5552@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5553
252b5132
RH
5554@need 2000
5555@node Operators
5556@subsection Operators
5557@cindex operators for arithmetic
5558@cindex arithmetic operators
5559@cindex precedence in expressions
5560The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5561the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5562@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5563@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5564@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5565@smallexample
5566precedence associativity Operators Notes
5567(highest)
55681 left ! - ~ (1)
55692 left * / %
55703 left + -
55714 left >> <<
55725 left == != > < <= >=
55736 left &
55747 left |
55758 left &&
55769 left ||
557710 right ? :
557811 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5579(lowest)
5580@end smallexample
5581Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5582(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5583(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5584@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5585@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5586@tex
5587\vskip \baselineskip
5588%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5589\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5590\hrule
5591\halign
5592{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5593height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5594&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5595height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5596\noalign{\hrule}
5597height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5598&highest&&&&&\cr
5599% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5600&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5601&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5602&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5603&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5604&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5605&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5606&7&&left&&|&\cr
5607&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5608&9&&left&&||&\cr
5609&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5610&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5611&lowest&&&&&\cr
5612height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5613\hrule}
5614@end tex
5615@iftex
5616{
5617@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5618@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5619@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5620}
5621@end iftex
5622@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5623
5624@node Evaluation
5625@subsection Evaluation
5626@cindex lazy evaluation
5627@cindex expression evaluation order
5628The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5629an expression when absolutely necessary.
5630
5631The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5632address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5633regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5634as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5635
5636However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5637until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5638other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5639for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5640
5641The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5642assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5643allocation.
5644
5645Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5646@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5647
5648If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5649available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5650following
5651@smallexample
5652@group
5653SECTIONS
5654 @{
a1ab1d2a 5655 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5656 @{ *(.text) @}
5657 @}
5658@end group
5659@end smallexample
5660@noindent
5661will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5662address}.
5663
5664@node Expression Section
5665@subsection The Section of an Expression
5666@cindex expression sections
5667@cindex absolute expressions
5668@cindex relative expressions
5669@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5670@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5671@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5672Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5673relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5674using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5675value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5676symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5677operations.
5678
abf4be64
AM
5679Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5680section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5681address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5682@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5683functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
5684One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5685(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
5686differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5687versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5688section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5689Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
5690absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5691given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5692everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
5693
5694In the following simple example,
252b5132 5695
7542af2a
AM
5696@smallexample
5697@group
5698SECTIONS
5699 @{
5700 . = 0x100;
5701 __executable_start = 0x100;
5702 .data :
5703 @{
5704 . = 0x10;
5705 __data_start = 0x10;
5706 *(.data)
5707 @}
5708 @dots{}
5709 @}
5710@end group
5711@end smallexample
252b5132 5712
7542af2a
AM
5713both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5714address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5715@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5716section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5717
5c3049d2
AM
5718For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5719addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
5720
5721@itemize @bullet
5722@item
c05f749e
AM
5723Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5724operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5725absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5726@item
7542af2a
AM
5727Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5728relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5729and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5730@item
c05f749e
AM
5731Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5732in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5733address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5734before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
5735@end itemize
5736
5737The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5738
5739@itemize @bullet
5740@item
5741An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5742@item
5743The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5744@item
9bc8bb33 5745The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 5746relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
9bc8bb33
AM
5747(after above conversions) is also a number.
5748@item
5749The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5750relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5751section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
5752@item
5753The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5754conversions) is an absolute address.
5755@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5756
5757You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5758to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5759create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5760section @samp{.data}:
5761@smallexample
5762SECTIONS
5763 @{
5764 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5765 @}
5766@end smallexample
5767@noindent
5768If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5769@samp{.data} section.
5770
7542af2a
AM
5771Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5772particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5773
252b5132
RH
5774@node Builtin Functions
5775@subsection Builtin Functions
5776@cindex functions in expressions
5777The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5778use in linker script expressions.
5779
5780@table @code
5781@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5782@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5783@cindex expression, absolute
5784Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5785of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5786value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5787normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5788
5789@item ADDR(@var{section})
5790@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5791@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 5792Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 5793script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
5794the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5795@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5796@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5797the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
5798@smallexample
5799@group
5800SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5801 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5802 @{
252b5132
RH
5803 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5804 @dots{}
5805 @}
5806 .output :
5807 @{
5808 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5809 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5810 @}
5811@dots{} @}
5812@end group
5813@end smallexample
5814
876f4090
NS
5815@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5816@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5817@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5818@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5819@cindex round up location counter
5820@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5821@cindex round up expression
5822@cindex align expression
5823Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5824to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5825doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5826arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5827expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5828equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5829
5830Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5831next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5832variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5833input sections:
252b5132
RH
5834@smallexample
5835@group
5836SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5837 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5838 *(.data)
5839 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5840 @}
5841@dots{} @}
5842@end group
5843@end smallexample
5844@noindent
5845The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5846a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5847a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5848of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5849
5850The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5851
362c1d1a
NS
5852@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5853@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5854@cindex section alignment
5855Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5856been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5857evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5858the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5859value in that section.
5860@smallexample
5861@group
5862SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5863 .output @{
5864 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5865 @dots{}
5866 @}
5867@dots{} @}
5868@end group
5869@end smallexample
5870
252b5132
RH
5871@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5872@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5873This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5874scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5875section.
5876
2d20f7bf
JJ
5877@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5878@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5879This is equivalent to either
5880@smallexample
5881(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5882@end smallexample
5883or
5884@smallexample
5885(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5886@end smallexample
5887@noindent
5888depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5889for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5890@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5891If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5892memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5893bytes in the on-disk file.
5894
5895This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5896any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5897@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5898be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5899working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5900
5901@noindent
5902Example:
5903@smallexample
5904 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5905@end smallexample
5906
5907@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5908@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5909This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5910evaluation purposes.
5911
5912@smallexample
5913 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5914@end smallexample
5915
a4f5ad88
JJ
5916@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5917@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5918This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 5919@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
5920When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5921does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5922@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5923boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5924it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
5925@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
5926padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
5927section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
5928
5929@smallexample
5930 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5931@end smallexample
5932
252b5132
RH
5933@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5934@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5935@cindex symbol defaults
5936Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5937defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5938return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5939default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5940shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5941the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5942existed, its value is preserved:
5943
5944@smallexample
5945@group
5946SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5947 .text : @{
5948 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5949 @dots{}
5950 @}
5951 @dots{}
5952@}
5953@end group
5954@end smallexample
5955
3ec57632
NC
5956@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5957@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5958Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5959
252b5132
RH
5960@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5961@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5962@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 5963Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
5964Section LMA}).
5965
2e53f7d6
NC
5966@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
5967@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
5968Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
5969@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
5970
252b5132
RH
5971@kindex MAX
5972@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5973Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5974
5975@kindex MIN
5976@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5977Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5978
5979@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5980@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5981@cindex unallocated address, next
5982Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5983This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5984use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5985output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5986
3ec57632
NC
5987@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5988@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5989Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5990
ba916c8a
MM
5991@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5992@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5993Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
5994value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
5995@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
5996will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
5997can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 5998``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
5999name.
6000
252b5132
RH
6001@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6002@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6003@cindex section size
6004Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6005been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6006evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6007@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6008@smallexample
6009@group
6010SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6011 .output @{
6012 .start = . ;
6013 @dots{}
6014 .end = . ;
6015 @}
6016 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6017 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6018@dots{} @}
6019@end group
6020@end smallexample
6021
6022@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6023@itemx sizeof_headers
6024@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6025@cindex header size
6026Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6027information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6028this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6029choose, to facilitate paging.
6030
6031@cindex not enough room for program headers
6032@cindex program headers, not enough room
6033When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6034@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6035number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6036addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6037additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6038room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6039the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6040script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6041you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6042command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6043@end table
6044
6045@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6046@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6047@cindex implicit linker scripts
6048If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6049an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6050linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6051linker will report an error.
6052
6053An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6054
6055Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6056assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6057commands.
6058
6059Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6060at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6061read. This can affect archive searching.
6062
6063@ifset GENERIC
6064@node Machine Dependent
6065@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6066
6067@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6068@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6069sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6070functionality are not listed.
6071
6072@menu
36f63dca
NC
6073@ifset H8300
6074* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6075@end ifset
6076@ifset I960
6077* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6078@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6079@ifset M68HC11
6080* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6081@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6082@ifset ARM
6083* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6084@end ifset
6085@ifset HPPA
6086* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6087@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6088@ifset M68K
6089* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6090@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6091@ifset MIPS
6092* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6093@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6094@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6095* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6096@end ifset
2469cfa2 6097@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6098* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6099@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6100@ifset NDS32
6101* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6102@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6103@ifset POWERPC
6104* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6105@end ifset
6106@ifset POWERPC64
6107* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6108@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6109@ifset SPU
6110* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6111@end ifset
74459f0e 6112@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6113* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6114@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6115@ifset WIN32
6116* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6117@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6118@ifset XTENSA
6119* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6120@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6121@end menu
6122@end ifset
6123
252b5132
RH
6124@ifset H8300
6125@ifclear GENERIC
6126@raisesections
6127@end ifclear
6128
6129@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6130@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6131
6132@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6133For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6134you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6135
6136@table @emph
6137@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6138@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6139@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6140targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6141program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6142respectively.
6143
6144@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6145@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6146@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6147@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6148sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6149page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6150(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6151@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6152top page of memory).
1502569c 6153
81f5558e
NC
6154@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6155indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6156displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6157the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6158@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6159whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6160range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6161
1502569c 6162@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6163@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6164biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6165which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6166page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6167(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6168@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6169the top page of memory).
6170
6171@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6172@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
617332 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6174changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6175(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6176@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6177the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6178@end table
6179
6180@ifclear GENERIC
6181@lowersections
6182@end ifclear
6183@end ifset
6184
36f63dca 6185@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6186@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6187@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6188@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6189@node Renesas
6190@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6191
c2dcd04e
NC
6192@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6193H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6194options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6195@end ifset
6196@end ifclear
6197
6198@ifset I960
6199@ifclear GENERIC
6200@raisesections
6201@end ifclear
6202
6203@node i960
6204@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6205
6206@cindex i960 support
6207
6208You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6209specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6210family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6211incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6212linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6213libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6214search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6215
6216For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6217well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6218paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6219the names
6220
6221@smallexample
6222@group
6223try
6224libtry.a
6225tryca
6226libtryca.a
6227@end group
6228@end smallexample
6229
6230@noindent
6231The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6232two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6233
6234You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6235the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6236use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6237specifies a library.
6238
6239@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6240@cindex relaxing on i960
6241@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6242you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6243@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6244them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6245instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6246instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6247target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6248not itself call any subroutines).
6249
48229727
JB
6250@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6251@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6252@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6253The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6254
6255The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6256
85fdf906
AH
6257@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6258@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6259The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6260
36f63dca
NC
6261@ifclear GENERIC
6262@lowersections
6263@end ifclear
6264@end ifset
6265
6266@ifset ARM
6267@ifclear GENERIC
6268@raisesections
6269@end ifclear
6270
93fd0973
SC
6271@ifset M68HC11
6272@ifclear GENERIC
6273@raisesections
6274@end ifclear
6275
6276@node M68HC11/68HC12
6277@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6278
6279@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6280
6281@subsection Linker Relaxation
6282
6283For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6284optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6285
6286@table @emph
6287@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6288@item relaxing address modes
6289@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6290targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6291program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6292respectively.
6293
6294@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6295transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6296page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6297
6298@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6299When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6300of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6301addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6302@code{bset} instructions.
6303
6304@end table
6305
6306@subsection Trampoline Generation
6307
6308@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6309@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6310For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6311call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6312will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6313trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6314case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6315point to the function trampoline.
6316
6317@ifclear GENERIC
6318@lowersections
6319@end ifclear
6320@end ifset
6321
36f63dca 6322@node ARM
3674e28a 6323@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6324
6325@cindex ARM interworking support
6326@kindex --support-old-code
6327For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6328between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6329been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6330line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6331libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6332option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6333given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6334which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6335the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6336non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6337
6338@cindex thumb entry point
6339@cindex entry point, thumb
6340@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6341The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6342@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6343But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6344branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6345executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6346
ce11ba6c
KT
6347@cindex PE import table prefixing
6348@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6349The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6350the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6351element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6352import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6353
e489d0ae
PB
6354@cindex BE8
6355@kindex --be8
6356The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6357executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6358The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6359
3674e28a
PB
6360@cindex TARGET1
6361@kindex --target1-rel
6362@kindex --target1-abs
6363The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6364@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6365or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6366and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6367
6368@cindex TARGET2
6369@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6370The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6371@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6372meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6373@table @samp
6374@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6375@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6376@item abs
6377@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6378@item got-rel
6379@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6380@end table
6381
319850b4
JB
6382@cindex FIX_V4BX
6383@kindex --fix-v4bx
6384The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6385specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6386interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6387also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6388
6389In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6390linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6391@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6392
6393In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6394relocations are ignored.
6395
845b51d6
PB
6396@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6397@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6398Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6399relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6400
6401@smallexample
6402TST rM, #1
6403MOVEQ PC, rM
6404BX Rn
6405@end smallexample
6406
6407This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6408and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6409condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6410
33bfe774
JB
6411@cindex USE_BLX
6412@kindex --use-blx
6413The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6414BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6415situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6416code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6417each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6418
6419This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6420specify it if you are using that target.
6421
c6dd86c6
JB
6422@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6423@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6424The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6425bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6426instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6427to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6428the support code can read the intended values.
6429
6430The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6431intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6432and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6433intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6434full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6435you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6436
6437If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6438enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6439@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6440mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6441vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6442@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6443
6444If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6445potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6446such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6447first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6448instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6449the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6450are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6451
2de70689
MGD
6452@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6453@kindex --fix-arm1176
6454@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6455The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6456in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6457are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6458unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6459
9d5777a3 6460Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6461Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6462http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6463
bf21ed78
MS
6464@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6465@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6466The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6467warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6468enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6469linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6470using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6471not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6472
6473@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6474@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6475The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6476warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6477@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6478linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6479using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6480
726150b7
NC
6481@cindex PIC_VENEER
6482@kindex --pic-veneer
6483The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6484ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6485is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6486@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6487
6488@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6489@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6490The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6491code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6492perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6493placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6494controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6495The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6496duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6497group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6498code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6499where they should be placed.
6500
6501The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6502@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6503placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6504branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6505placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6506value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6507exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6508A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6509linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6510from the input sections.
6511
6512The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6513@samp{N = +1}.
6514
1a51c1a4
NC
6515Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6516only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6517otherwise.
6518
36f63dca
NC
6519@ifclear GENERIC
6520@lowersections
6521@end ifclear
6522@end ifset
6523
6524@ifset HPPA
6525@ifclear GENERIC
6526@raisesections
6527@end ifclear
6528
6529@node HPPA ELF32
6530@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6531@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6532@kindex --multi-subspace
6533When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6534import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6535The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6536stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6537multiple sub-spaces.
6538
6539@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6540@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6541Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6542stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6543@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6544sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6545a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6546the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6547conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6548prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6549A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6550branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6551@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6552@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6553detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6554positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6555
6556Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6557single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6558create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6559large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6560
6561@ifclear GENERIC
6562@lowersections
6563@end ifclear
6564@end ifset
6565
7fb9f789
NC
6566@ifset M68K
6567@ifclear GENERIC
6568@raisesections
6569@end ifclear
6570
6571@node M68K
6572@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6573
6574@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6575@kindex --got=@var{type}
6576The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6577The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6578@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6579the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6580@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6581entries only at non-negative offsets.
6582@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6583entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6584support such GOTs.
6585@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6586output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6587file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6588files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6589
6590@ifclear GENERIC
6591@lowersections
6592@end ifclear
6593@end ifset
6594
833794fc
MR
6595@ifset MIPS
6596@ifclear GENERIC
6597@raisesections
6598@end ifclear
6599
6600@node MIPS
6601@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6602
6603@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6604@kindex --insn32
6605@kindex --no-insn32
6606The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6607microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6608in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6609used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6610or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6611including 16-bit ones where possible.
6612
6613@ifclear GENERIC
6614@lowersections
6615@end ifclear
6616@end ifset
6617
36f63dca
NC
6618@ifset MMIX
6619@ifclear GENERIC
6620@raisesections
6621@end ifclear
6622
6623@node MMIX
6624@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6625For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6626@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6627understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6628can translate between the two formats.
6629
6630There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6631Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6632registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6633equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6634@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6635global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6636this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6637symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6638
7a2de473
HPN
6639Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6640@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6641The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6642of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6643
6644Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6645are left out from an mmo file.
6646
6647@ifclear GENERIC
6648@lowersections
6649@end ifclear
6650@end ifset
6651
6652@ifset MSP430
6653@ifclear GENERIC
6654@raisesections
6655@end ifclear
6656
6657@node MSP430
6658@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6659For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6660will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6661just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6662
6663@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6664The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6665
6666@table @code
6667@item @samp{.vectors}
6668Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6669
6670@item @samp{.bootloader}
6671Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6672in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6673
6674@item @samp{.infomem}
6675Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6676this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6677
c0065db7 6678@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6679This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6680in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6681
6682@item @samp{.noinit}
6683Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6684
c0065db7 6685The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6686@end table
6687
6688@ifclear GENERIC
6689@lowersections
6690@end ifclear
6691@end ifset
6692
35c08157
KLC
6693@ifset NDS32
6694@ifclear GENERIC
6695@raisesections
6696@end ifclear
6697
6698@node NDS32
6699@section @code{ld} and NDS32
6700@kindex relaxing on NDS32
6701For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
6702relaxes objects according to these options.
6703
6704@table @code
6705@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
6706Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
6707
6708@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
6709Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
6710
6711@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
6712Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
6713
6714@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
6715Export the EX9 table after linking.
6716
6717@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
6718Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
6719
6720@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
6721Update the existing EX9 table.
6722
6723@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
6724Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
6725
6726@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
6727Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
6728
6729@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
6730Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
6731
6732@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
6733Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
6734@end table
6735
6736@ifclear GENERIC
6737@lowersections
6738@end ifclear
6739@end ifset
6740
2a60a7a8
AM
6741@ifset POWERPC
6742@ifclear GENERIC
6743@raisesections
6744@end ifclear
6745
6746@node PowerPC ELF32
6747@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6748@cindex PowerPC long branches
6749@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6750Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6751displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6752@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6753@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6754the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6755section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6756section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6757@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6758both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6759considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6760
6761@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6762@table @option
6763@cindex PowerPC PLT
6764@kindex --bss-plt
6765@item --bss-plt
6766Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6767generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6768the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6769writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6770@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6771PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6772compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6773BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6774
016687f8
AM
6775@kindex --secure-plt
6776@item --secure-plt
6777@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6778@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6779when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6780layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6781style BSS PLT.
6782
2a60a7a8
AM
6783@cindex PowerPC GOT
6784@kindex --sdata-got
6785@item --sdata-got
6786The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6787sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6788@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6789section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6790@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6791@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6792@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6793@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6794PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6795pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6796GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6797really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6798
6799@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6800@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6801@item --emit-stub-syms
6802This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6803symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6804
6805@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6806@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6807@item --no-tls-optimize
6808PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6809sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6810disable the optimization.
6811@end table
6812
6813@ifclear GENERIC
6814@lowersections
6815@end ifclear
6816@end ifset
6817
6818@ifset POWERPC64
6819@ifclear GENERIC
6820@raisesections
6821@end ifclear
6822
6823@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6824@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6825
6826@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6827@table @option
6828@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6829@kindex --stub-group-size
6830@item --stub-group-size
6831Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6832by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6833@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6834sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6835a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6836the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6837conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6838prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6839A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6840branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6841@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6842@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6843detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6844positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6845
6846Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6847single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6848create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6849large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6850
6851@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6852@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6853@item --emit-stub-syms
6854This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6855symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6856
6857@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6858@kindex --dotsyms
6859@kindex --no-dotsyms
6860@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6861These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6862in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6863function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6864code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6865properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6866to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6867@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6868dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6869feature.
6870
6871@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6872@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6873@item --no-tls-optimize
6874PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6875sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6876disable the optimization.
6877
6878@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6879@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6880@item --no-opd-optimize
6881PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6882corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6883the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6884Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6885
6886@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6887@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6888@item --non-overlapping-opd
6889Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6890@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6891the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6892entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6893
6894@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6895@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6896@item --no-toc-optimize
6897PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6898entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6899reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6900marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6901marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6902relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6903unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6904reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6905discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6906reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6907code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6908optimization.
6909
6910@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6911@kindex --no-multi-toc
6912@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
6913If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
6914@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
6915where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
6916entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6917total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6918grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6919TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6920calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6921help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
692264K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6923Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
6924
6925@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
6926@kindex --no-toc-sort
6927@item --no-toc-sort
6928By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
6929happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
6930placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
6931with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
6932referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
6933@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
6934results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
6935off this feature.
6936
6937@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
6938@kindex --plt-align
6939@kindex --no-plt-align
6940@item --plt-align
6941@itemx --no-plt-align
6942Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
6943aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
6944boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. By default PLT call stubs
6945are packed tightly.
6946
6947@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
6948@kindex --plt-static-chain
6949@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
6950@item --plt-static-chain
6951@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
6952Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
6953chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
6954chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
6955
6956@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
6957@kindex --plt-thread-safe
6958@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
6959@item --plt-thread-safe
6960@itemx --no-thread-safe
6961With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
6962lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
6963another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
6964order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
6965memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
6966barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
6967looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
6968seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
6969default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
6970@end table
6971
6972@ifclear GENERIC
6973@lowersections
6974@end ifclear
6975@end ifset
6976
49fa1e15
AM
6977@ifset SPU
6978@ifclear GENERIC
6979@raisesections
6980@end ifclear
6981
6982@node SPU ELF
6983@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6984
6985@cindex SPU ELF options
6986@table @option
6987
6988@cindex SPU plugins
6989@kindex --plugin
6990@item --plugin
6991This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6992
6993@cindex SPU overlays
6994@kindex --no-overlays
6995@item --no-overlays
6996Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6997regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6998@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6999turns off all this special overlay handling.
7000
7001@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7002@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7003@item --emit-stub-syms
7004This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7005symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7006
7007@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7008@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7009@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7010This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7011function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7012on calls to non-overlay regions.
7013
7014@cindex SPU local store size
7015@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7016@item --local-store=lo:hi
7017@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7018the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7019range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7020
c0065db7 7021@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7022@kindex --stack-analysis
7023@item --stack-analysis
7024SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7025unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7026under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7027@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7028@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7029determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7030for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7031for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7032for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7033find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7034and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7035under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7036dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7037is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7038and calls will be given.
7039
c0065db7 7040@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7041@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7042@item --emit-stack-syms
7043This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7044in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7045These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7046functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7047functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7048such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7049The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7050@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7051@end table
7052
7053@ifclear GENERIC
7054@lowersections
7055@end ifclear
7056@end ifset
7057
36f63dca
NC
7058@ifset TICOFF
7059@ifclear GENERIC
7060@raisesections
7061@end ifclear
7062
7063@node TI COFF
7064@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7065@cindex TI COFF versions
7066@kindex --format=@var{version}
7067The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7068TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7069also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7070format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7071header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7072
7073@ifclear GENERIC
7074@lowersections
7075@end ifclear
7076@end ifset
7077
2ca22b03
NC
7078@ifset WIN32
7079@ifclear GENERIC
7080@raisesections
7081@end ifclear
7082
7083@node WIN32
7084@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7085
c0065db7 7086This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7087See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7088command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7089
7090@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7091@cindex import libraries
7092@item import libraries
69da35b5 7093The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7094libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7095regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7096archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7097support for creating such libraries provided with the
7098@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7099
c0065db7
RM
7100@item exporting DLL symbols
7101@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7102The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7103
7104@table @emph
7105@item using auto-export functionality
7106@cindex using auto-export functionality
7107By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7108which is controlled by the following command line options:
7109
0a5d968e
NC
7110@itemize
7111@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7112@item --exclude-symbols
7113@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7114@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7115@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7116@end itemize
7117
09e2aba4
DK
7118When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7119(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7120symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7121often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7122private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7123options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7124exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7125final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7126
7127If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7128command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7129if either of the following are true:
7130
7131@itemize
7132@item A DEF file is used.
7133@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7134@end itemize
dc8465bf 7135
c0065db7
RM
7136@item using a DEF file
7137@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7138Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7139an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7140exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7141name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7142command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7143
7144@example
7145gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7146@end example
7147
0a5d968e
NC
7148Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7149@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7150
dc8465bf
NC
7151Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7152
7153@example
4b5bd4e7 7154LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7155
7156EXPORTS
7157foo
7158bar
7159_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7160another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7161var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7162doo = foo == foo2
7163eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7164@end example
dc8465bf 7165
7fcab871 7166This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7167symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7168alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7169by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7170@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7171@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7172export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7173in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7174symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7175
6b31ad16
DS
7176The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7177name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7178the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7179
b45619c0
NC
7180When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7181library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7182@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7183executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7184
7185With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7186specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7187non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7188
7189If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7190or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7191filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7192
4b5bd4e7
DS
7193The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7194
7195@example
7196EXPORTS
7197 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7198 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7199 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7200@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7201
7202Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7203@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7204@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7205@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7206Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7207@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7208string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7209
7210The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7211
7212@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7213will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7214by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7215linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7216library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7217
7218@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7219The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7220the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7221@code{*_imp__foo}).
7222
7223@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7224well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7225read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7226variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7227the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7228extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7229application will behave unexpectedly.
7230
7231@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7232it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7233symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7234API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7235the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7236
4b5bd4e7
DS
7237See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7238other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7239
7240@cindex creating a DEF file
7241While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7242with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7243
7244@item Using decorations
7245@cindex Using decorations
7246Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7247itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7248declared as:
7249
7250@example
7251__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7252__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7253@end example
7254
7255All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7256any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7257this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7258the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7259
7260Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7261decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7262instead:
7263
7264@example
7265__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7266__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7267@end example
7268
c0065db7
RM
7269This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7270when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7271variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7272code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7273of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7274omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7275@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7276information.
c0065db7 7277@end table
dc8465bf 7278
2ca22b03
NC
7279@cindex automatic data imports
7280@item automatic data imports
7281The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7282by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7283compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7284issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7285code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7286c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7287initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7288decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7289platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7290command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7291The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7292suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7293trigger the feature's use.
7294
c0065db7 7295auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7296additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7297
c0065db7 7298"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7299documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7300
c0065db7
RM
7301The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7302occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7303One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7304below.
7305
7306@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7307For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7308object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7309offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7310field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7311in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7312without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7313The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7314references.
7315
c0065db7
RM
7316The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7317be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7318themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7319runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7320compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7321support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7322run without error on an older system.
7323
c0065db7
RM
7324@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7325enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7326
7327@cindex direct linking to a dll
7328@item direct linking to a dll
7329The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7330including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7331libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7332traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7333libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7334function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7335though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7336storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7337tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7338large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7339
c0065db7 7340Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7341@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7342of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7343perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7344select the dll instead of an import library.
7345
2ca22b03 7346
69da35b5
NC
7347For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7348to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7349
7350@example
45e948fe
NC
7351libxxx.dll.a
7352xxx.dll.a
7353libxxx.a
7354xxx.lib
69da35b5 7355cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7356libxxx.dll
7357xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7358@end example
7359
69da35b5
NC
7360before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7361
c0065db7
RM
7362(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7363where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7364@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7365file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7366@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7367
c0065db7
RM
7368Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7369@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7370was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7371various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7372could coexist on the same machine.
7373
2ca22b03
NC
7374The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7375applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7376libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7377
7378@example
7379bin/
7380 cygxxx.dll
7381lib/
7382 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7383 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7384@end example
7385
c0065db7
RM
7386Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7387done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7388
73891. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7390@example
7391gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7392@end example
2ca22b03 7393
69da35b5
NC
7394However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7395(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7396@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7397not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7398
2ca22b03
NC
73992. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7400directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7401should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7402making the app/dll.
7403
7404@example
7405ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7406@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7407
7408Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7409
7410@example
7411gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7412@end example
69da35b5
NC
7413
7414This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7415perfectly legal
7416
7417@example
7418bin/
7419 cygxxx-5.dll
7420lib/
c0065db7 7421 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7422@end example
7423
dc8465bf 7424Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7425even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7426@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7427
7428Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7429wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7430
74311. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7432work with auto-imported data.
7433
dc8465bf
NC
74342. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7435import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7436symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7437for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7438possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7439
45e948fe
NC
74403. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7441critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7442in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7443stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7444
69da35b5 7445So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7446true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7447a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7448binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7449massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7450requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7451will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7452
c0065db7 7453@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7454@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7455@item adding additional names
7456Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7457A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7458exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7459when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7460import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7461
c0065db7 7462@example
dc8465bf
NC
7463LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7464
7465EXPORTS
c0065db7 7466foo
dc8465bf 7467_foo = foo
c0065db7 7468@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7469
7470The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7471
7472Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7473source code using the "weak" attribute:
7474
c0065db7
RM
7475@example
7476void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7477void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7478@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7479
7480See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7481symbols.
7482
7483@item renaming symbols
7484Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7485kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7486@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7487DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7488created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7489
c0065db7 7490@example
dc8465bf
NC
7491LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7492
7493EXPORTS
7494_foo = foo
c0065db7 7495@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7496
7497The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7498@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7499@end table
dc8465bf 7500
0a5d968e 7501Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7502unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7503If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7504@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7505that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7506@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7507renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7508to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7509the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7510In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7511which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7512
7513@cindex weak externals
7514@item weak externals
7515The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7516weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7517defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7518are three variants of weak externals:
7519@itemize
7520@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7521called lazy externals.
7522@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7523This form is not presently implemented.
7524@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7525implemented.
7526@end itemize
7527As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7528are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7529uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7530
7531@cindex aligned common symbols
7532@item aligned common symbols
7533As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7534desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7535the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7536carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7537by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7538tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7539but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7540warnings about unknown linker directives.
2ca22b03
NC
7541@end table
7542
7543@ifclear GENERIC
7544@lowersections
7545@end ifclear
7546@end ifset
7547
e0001a05
NC
7548@ifset XTENSA
7549@ifclear GENERIC
7550@raisesections
7551@end ifclear
7552
7553@node Xtensa
7554@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7555
7556@cindex Xtensa processors
7557The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7558@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7559specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7560keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7561example, with the command:
7562
7563@smallexample
7564SECTIONS
7565@{
7566 .text : @{
7567 *(.literal .text)
7568 @}
7569@}
7570@end smallexample
7571
7572@noindent
7573@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7574and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7575literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7576interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7577group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7578files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7579and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7580
43cd72b9 7581@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7582@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7583Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7584provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7585is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7586literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7587will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7588location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7589the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7590unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7591@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7592range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7593
7594For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7595to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7596instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7597instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7598instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7599@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7600hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7601By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7602switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7603density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7604instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7605performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7606linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7607a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7608
7609The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7610control the linker:
7611
7612@cindex Xtensa options
7613@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7614@item --size-opt
7615When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7616more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7617no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7618alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7619preserve the correctness of the code.
7620@end table
e0001a05
NC
7621
7622@ifclear GENERIC
7623@lowersections
7624@end ifclear
7625@end ifset
7626
252b5132
RH
7627@ifclear SingleFormat
7628@node BFD
7629@chapter BFD
7630
7631@cindex back end
7632@cindex object file management
7633@cindex object formats available
7634@kindex objdump -i
7635The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7636These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7637object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7638format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7639it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7640associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7641object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7642(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7643list all the formats available for your configuration.
7644
7645@cindex BFD requirements
7646@cindex requirements for BFD
7647As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7648several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7649BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7650formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7651been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7652BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7653may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7654
7655One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7656mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7657useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7658conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7659
7660@menu
7661* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7662@end menu
7663
7664@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7665@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7666@cindex opening object files
7667@include bfdsumm.texi
7668@end ifclear
7669
7670@node Reporting Bugs
7671@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7672@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7673@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7674
ff5dcc92 7675Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7676
7677Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7678it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7679to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7680work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7681@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7682
7683In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7684information that enables us to fix the bug.
7685
7686@menu
7687* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7688* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7689@end menu
7690
7691@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7692@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7693@cindex bug criteria
7694
7695If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7696
7697@itemize @bullet
7698@cindex fatal signal
7699@cindex linker crash
7700@cindex crash of linker
7701@item
7702If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7703@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7704
7705@cindex error on valid input
7706@item
ff5dcc92 7707If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7708
7709@cindex invalid input
7710@item
ff5dcc92 7711If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7712may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7713object files are correct.
7714
7715@item
7716If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7717improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7718@end itemize
7719
7720@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7721@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7722@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7723@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7724
7725A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7726products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7727recommend you contact that organization first.
7728
7729You can find contact information for many support companies and
7730individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7731distribution.
7732
ad22bfe8 7733@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7734Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7735@value{BUGURL}.
7736@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7737
7738The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7739@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7740fact or leave it out, state it!
7741
7742Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7743problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7744assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7745matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7746the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7747location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7748were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7749into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7750specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7751and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7752
7753Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7754the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7755on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7756
7757Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7758bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7759respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7760You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7761
7762To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7763
7764@itemize @bullet
7765@item
ff5dcc92 7766The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7767the @samp{--version} argument.
7768
7769Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7770the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7771
7772@item
ff5dcc92 7773Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7774patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7775
7776@item
7777The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7778version number.
7779
7780@item
ff5dcc92 7781What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7782``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7783
7784@item
7785The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7786observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7787list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7788sufficient.
7789
7790If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7791and then we might not encounter the bug.
7792
7793@item
7794A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7795bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7796provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7797bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7798state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7799requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7800we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7801attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7802
7803If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7804@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7805object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7806@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7807how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7808
7809@item
7810A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7811incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7812
ff5dcc92 7813Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7814will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7815not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7816a chance to make a mistake.
7817
7818Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7819say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7820copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7821C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7822and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7823fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7824you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7825any conclusion from our observations.
7826
7827@item
ff5dcc92 7828If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7829diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7830@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7831If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7832context, not by line number.
7833
7834The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7835sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7836@end itemize
7837
7838Here are some things that are not necessary:
7839
7840@itemize @bullet
7841@item
7842A description of the envelope of the bug.
7843
7844Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7845which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7846changes will not affect it.
7847
7848This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7849will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7850with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7851We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7852
7853Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7854of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7855output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7856less time, and so on.
7857
7858However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7859report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7860
7861@item
7862A patch for the bug.
7863
7864A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7865the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7866a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7867to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7868
ff5dcc92 7869Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7870construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7871through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7872able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7873fixed.
7874
7875And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7876patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7877help us to understand.
7878
7879@item
7880A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7881
7882Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7883things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7884@end itemize
7885
7886@node MRI
7887@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7888@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7889To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7890linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7891alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7892described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7893simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7894@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7895linker commands; these commands are described here.
7896
7897In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7898file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7899features to make use of them.
7900
7901You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7902@samp{-c} command-line option.
7903
7904Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7905command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7906blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 7907MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7908issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7909
7910Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7911
7912You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7913lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7914The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7915
7916@table @code
7917@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7918@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7919@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7920Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
7921the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7922@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7923your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7924script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7925commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7926input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7927@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7928
7929@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7930@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7931Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7932in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7933
7934@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7935
7936@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7937@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7938Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7939@var{expression} should be a power of two.
7940
7941@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7942@item BASE @var{expression}
7943Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7944absolute addresses) in the output file.
7945
7946@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7947@item CHIP @var{expression}
7948@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7949This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7950
7951@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7952@item END
7953This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7954
7955@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7956@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7957Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 7958language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
7959
7960@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 7961@item
252b5132
RH
7962S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7963
7964@item
7965IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7966
7967@item
7968COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7969@samp{COFF}
7970@end enumerate
7971
7972@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7973@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7974Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 7975@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
7976
7977The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7978same line, with no change in its effect.
7979
7980@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7981@item LOAD @var{filename}
7982@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7983Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 7984same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7985command line.
7986
7987@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7988@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 7989@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
7990MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7991option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7992
7993@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7994@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7995@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7996Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
7997order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7998script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7999sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8000file, in the order specified.
8001
8002@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8003@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8004@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8005@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8006Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8007@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8008
8009@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8010@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8011@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8012@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8013You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8014specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8015If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8016@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8017@end table
8018
793c5807
NC
8019@node GNU Free Documentation License
8020@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8021@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8022
370b66a1
CD
8023@node LD Index
8024@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8025
8026@printindex cp
8027
8028@tex
7ca01ed9 8029% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8030% meantime:
8031\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8032\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8033\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8034\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8035\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8036\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8037\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8038\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8039\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8040% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8041@end tex
8042
252b5132 8043@bye